Allen-Bradley 1747-L511, 1747-L514, 1747-L524, 1747-L531, 1747-L532, 1747-L541, 1747-L542, 1747-L543, 1747-L551, 1747-L552, 1747-L553 SLC 500 User Manual

SLC 500™ Modular
Hardware Style
(Catalog Numbers 1747-L511,
1747-L514, 1747-L524, 1747-L531,
1747-L532, 1747-L541, 1747-L542,
1747-L543, 1747-L551, 1747-L552,
1747-L553)
User Manual
Important User Information
Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this
publication, those responsible for the application and use of these
products must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken
to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety
requirements, including any applicable laws, regulations, codes and
standards. In no event will Rockwell Automation be responsible or liable
for indirect or consequential damage resulting from the use or application
of these products.
Any illustrations, charts, sample programs, and layout examples shown in
this publication are intended solely for purposes of example. Since there
are many variables and requirements associated with any particular
installation, Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or
liability (to include intellectual property liability) for actual use based
upon the examples shown in this publication.
Allen-Bradley publication SGI-1.1, Safety Guidelines for the Application,
Installation and Maintenance of Solid-State Control (available from your
local Rockwell Automation office), describes some important differences
between solid-state equipment and electromechanical devices that should
be taken into consideration when applying products such as those
described in this publication.
Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication, in whole or
part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, is prohibited.
Throughout this publication, notes may be used to make you aware of
safety considerations. The following annotations and their accompanying
statements help you to identify a potential hazard, avoid a potential
hazard, and recognize the consequences of a potential hazard:
WARNING
!
ATTENTION
!
IMPORTANT
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can cause an explosion in a
hazardous environment, which may lead to personal
injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
Identifies information about practices or
circumstances that can lead to personal injury or
death, property damage, or economic loss.
Identifies information that is critical for successful
application and understanding of the product.
PLC, SLC, and Allen-Bradley are registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation. MicroLogix, RSLogix, RSLinx, PanelView and
DTAM are trademarks of Rockwell Automation.
Modbus is a trademark of Schneider Automation, Incorporated.
DeviceNet is a trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association (ODVA).
Summary of Changes
The information below summarizes the changes to this manual since
the last printing.
To help you find new and updated information in this release of the
manual, we have included change bars as shown to the right of this
paragraph.
For information on:
See
corrected vibration specification
page 2-10
updated 1746-P4 power supply line voltage specifications
pages 1-4 and 1-5
page 2-14
page 6-7
the 1747-UIC Universal Serial Bus Interface Converter
pages 1-2 and 1-8
page 2-19
pages A-3 and A-5
processor error resulting from incorrect J4 jumper position
pages 10-13 and 10-20
DF1 Radio Modem Driver
page B-7
support for initiating broadcast write commands in
operating system versions FRN6
page B-5
revised BOOTP procedures for configuring SLC 5/05
processors
page E-6
using DCHP to configure SLC 5/05 processors
page E-9
SLC 5/05 enhanced web-server capability
page E-12
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
2
Summary of Changes
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Table of Contents
Preface
Who Should Use this Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose of this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Techniques Used in this Manual . . . . . .
Rockwell Automation Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Your Questions or Comments on this Manual .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
P-1
P-1
P-2
P-3
P-3
P-4
Chapter 1
Quick Start for Experienced Users Required Tools and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Chapter 2
Selecting Your Hardware
Components
i
European Union Directive Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Your Modular Control System . . . . . . . . . . . .
Principles of Machine Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Modular Processors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processor Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processor Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLC 500 System Test General Specifications. . . . . . . . . .
Processor General Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Backup for the 1747-L511, SLC 5/01 Processor .
Selecting Discrete I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Specialty I/O Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example for Selecting Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example Worksheet for Selecting a 1746 Power Supply .
Selecting Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Operator Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming with a Hand-Held Terminal . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming with a Personal Computer . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter (1761-NET-AIC) . . .
DH-485 Interface Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring with a Data Table Access Module . . . . . . . .
Monitoring with a PanelView™ Operator Terminal . . . .
Selecting a Memory Module for the SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02
Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Memory Module for SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04,
and SLC 5/05 Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EEPROM Burning Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Isolation Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-12
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-18
2-18
2-18
2-18
2-19
2-19
2-19
2-20
2-21
2-22
2-23
2-24
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
ii
Table of Contents
Special Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Class I, Division 2 Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Selecting Contact Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Chapter 3
System Installation
Recommendations
Typical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spacing Your Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventing Excessive Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Grounding Considerations for DC Applications
using 1746-P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modification to the SLC 500 Series A Chassis . . . . . . . .
Determining the Date of the SLC 500 Series A Chassis .
Master Control Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency-Stop Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolation Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounded ac Power-Distribution System with
Master-Control Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Required Input Voltage Characteristics .
Loss of Power Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input States on Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Types of Line Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disconnecting Main Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit . . . . . . .
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-6
3-6
3-7
3-7
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-9
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-10
3-11
3-11
3-11
3-12
3-12
3-12
3-12
3-12
3-13
3-13
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-4
Chapter 4
Mounting Your SLC 500 Control
System
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Mounting Modular Hardware Style Units . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-Slot Modular Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-Slot Modular Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-Slot Modular Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-Slot Modular Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Link Coupler (AIC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Table Access Module (DTAM, DTAM Plus, and
DTAM Micro). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter (1761-NET-AIC)
DeviceNet Interface (1761-NET-DNI)
Ethernet Interface (1761-NET-ENI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 4-5
. . 4-6
Table of Contents
iii
Chapter 5
Identifying the Components of
Your Processor
SLC 5/01 Processor Hardware Features . . . . .
SLC 5/02 Processor Hardware Features . . . . .
SLC 5/03 Processor Hardware Features . . . . .
SLC 5/04 Processor Hardware Features . . . . .
SLC 5/05 Processor Hardware Features . . . . .
Keyswitch for the
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processors .
RUN Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROG Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REM Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-1
5-3
5-6
5-9
5-12
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-15
5-15
5-15
5-16
Chapter 6
Installing Your Hardware
Components
Compliance to European Union Directives .
EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Your Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Your Memory Module. . . . . . . . .
Removing the Memory Module. . . . . . .
Installing Your Power Supply . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Your Chassis Interconnect Cable .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-1
6-1
6-2
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-5
6-8
Defining Sinking and Sourcing. . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Output Circuits — AC or DC . . .
Solid-State DC I/O Circuits . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing Your Wiring Layout . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommendations for Wiring I/O Devices . .
Features of an I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Your I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octal Label Kit Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying the Octal Filter Label . . . . . . . .
Applying the Octal Door Label . . . . . . . .
Octal Kit and I/O Module Information . .
Using the Removable Terminal Block (RTB).
Removing the RTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the RTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-1
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-6
7-6
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-9
7-10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-1
8-2
8-2
8-3
Chapter 7
Wiring Your I/O Modules
Chapter 8
Starting Up Your Control System
Procedures for Starting the Control System .
1. Inspect Your Installation . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Disconnect Motion-Causing Device . . . .
3. Initialize and Test Your Processor . . . . .
.
.
.
.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
iv
Table of Contents
4. Test Your Inputs . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Troubleshooting Steps. .
5. Test Your Outputs. . . . . . . . . .
Output Troubleshooting Steps
6. Enter and Test Your Program. .
7. Observe Control Motion . . . . .
8. Conduct a Dry Run . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-5
8-6
8-6
8-8
8-9
8-11
8-12
Handling and Storing Battery, Catalog Number 1747-BA .
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing and Replacing the Battery of the SLC 5/01 or
SLC 5/02 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Your SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 Battery .
Replacing Retainer Clips on an I/O Module . . . . . . . . . .
Removing Damaged Retainer Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing New Retainer Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a Fuse on the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9-1
9-1
9-2
9-2
9-3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9-3
9-4
9-6
9-6
9-7
9-7
Contacting Rockwell Automation for Assistance . . . . . . . .
Tips for Troubleshooting Your Control System . . . . . . . . .
Removing Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Alteration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting the SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 Processors . .
Identifying SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 Processor Errors. . .
Identifying SLC 5/02 Processor Communication Errors .
Troubleshooting the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and
SLC 5/05 Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearing SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processor
Faults Using the Keyswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
Processor Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
Processor Communication Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying Processor Errors while Downloading an
Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Returning the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
Processors to “Initial Factory Conditions” . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10-1
10-2
10-2
10-3
10-3
10-3
10-4
10-8
Chapter 9
Maintaining Your Control System
Chapter 10
Troubleshooting
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
. 10-9
. 10-9
10-10
10-14
10-19
10-21
Table of Contents
Troubleshooting Your Input Modules. . . . .
Input Circuit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Your Input Modules . .
Troubleshooting Your Output Modules . . .
Output Circuit Operation . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Your Output Modules.
v
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10-23
10-23
10-24
10-25
10-25
10-26
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-3
DH-485 Network Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DH-485 Network Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DH-485 Token Rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DH-485 Network Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Devices that Use the DH-485 Network . . . . . . . . . . . .
1747-AIC Isolated Link Coupler for DH-485 . . . . . . . .
1747-UIC USB to DH-485 Interface Converter. . . . . . .
Example System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
Channel 0 for DH485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important Planning Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the DH-485 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DH-485 Communication Cable and Isolated
Link Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the DH-485 Communication Cable . . . . .
Connecting the Communication Cable to the
Isolated Link Coupler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Powering the Link Coupler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing and Attaching the Link Couplers . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A-1
A-2
A-2
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-7
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. A-8
. A-9
. A-9
A-11
A-13
Chapter 11
Replacement Parts
Replacement Cables and Connectors
Cable Connectivity Summary . . .
Replacement Terminal Blocks. . .
Other Replacement Hardware. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Appendix A
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
. . . A-13
. . . A-13
. . . A-14
. . . A-16
. . . A-19
Appendix B
RS-232 Communication Interface
RS-232 and SCADA Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-232 Communication Interface Overview . . . . . . . . . .
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors and RS-232
Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLC 500 Devices that Support RS-232 Communication. . .
1770-KF3 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1747-KE Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1746-BAS and 1746-BAS-T Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . B-1
. . B-1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
B-2
B-3
B-3
B-3
B-3
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
vi
Table of Contents
DF1 Protocol and the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DF1 Full-Duplex Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Full-Duplex (Point-to-Point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DF1 Half-Duplex Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DF1 Radio Modem Channel 0 Driver . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASCII Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DF1 Communication Protocol Modems Overview. . . . . .
Wiring Connectors for RS-232 Communication . . . . . . . .
Types of RS-232 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTE Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCE Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin Assignments for Wiring Connectors. . . . . . . . . . .
Applications for the RS-232 Communication Interface . . .
DF1 Full-Duplex Peer-to-Peer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Half-Duplex with Slave-to-Slave Routing . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
B-4
B-4
B-5
B-5
B-7
B-10
B-10
B-11
B-11
B-11
B-12
B-12
B-19
B-19
B-19
Data Highway Plus Communication Protocol Overview . .
SLC 5/04 Processors and DH+ Communication. . . . . . . . .
DH+ Channel 1, 3-Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DH+ Channel 1, 8-Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Connectors for DH+ Communication for SLC 5/04
Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimizing Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical DH+ Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
C-1
C-2
C-2
C-2
Appendix C
Setting Up the DH+ Network
. C-4
. C-5
. C-6
Appendix D
Control Networks
Allen-Bradley Remote I/O Network . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote I/O Passthru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DeviceNet Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The 1747-SDN DeviceNet Scanner . . . . . . . . . .
The 1761-NET-DNI DeviceNet Interface . . . . . .
DeviceNet Network Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlNet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The 1747-SCNR ControlNet Scanner Module . . .
The 1747-KFC15 ControlNet Messaging Module.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
D-1
D-2
D-3
D-3
D-4
D-5
D-6
D-6
D-6
SLC 5/05 Processors and Ethernet Communication . . . .
SLC 5/05 Performance Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLC 5/05 and PC Connections to the Ethernet Network.
Ethernet Network Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Channel 1 8-Pin 10Base-T Connector. . . . .
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
E-1
E-2
E-3
E-3
E-4
E-4
Appendix E
Communicating with Devices on
an Ethernet Network
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Table of Contents
Ethernet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Ethernet Channel on the SLC 5/05 . . . . .
Configuration Using RSLogix 500 Programming Software
Configuration Via BOOTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Rockwell BOOTP Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using DCHP Software To Configure Your Processor . . . .
Using Subnet Masks and Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manually Configuring Channel 1 for Processors on
Subnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLC 5/05 Embedded Web Server Capability . . . . . . . . . .
Module Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TCP/IP Configuration Data (Read Only) . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Table Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Table Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Provided Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
vii
E-4
E-5
E-6
E-6
E-8
E-9
E-10
E-11
E-12
E-13
E-13
E-14
E-15
E-16
E-16
Appendix F
Power Supply Worksheet
Power Supply Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Blank Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4
Appendix G
Calculating Heat Dissipation for
the SLC 500 Control System
Definition of Key Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating Module Heat Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculated Watts vs. Total Watts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Loading Reference Table . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Heat Dissipation Graphs. . . . . . . . . . .
Example Heat Dissipation Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example Worksheet for Calculating Heat Dissipation.
Blank Worksheet for Calculating Heat Dissipation . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
G-1
G-1
G-2
G-3
G-6
G-7
G-8
G-9
Glossary
Index
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
viii
Table of Contents
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Preface
Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of the manual. It
provides information concerning:
•
•
•
•
•
Who Should Use this
Manual
who should use this manual
the purpose of this manual
related documentation
conventions used in this manual
Rockwell Automation support
Use this manual if you are responsible for designing, installing,
programming, or troubleshooting control systems that use SLC 500
programmable controllers.
You should have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and
familiarity with relay logic. If you do not, obtain the proper training
before using this product.
Purpose of this Manual
This manual describes the procedures you use to install, wire, and
troubleshoot your controller. This manual:
• explains how to install and wire your controllers
• gives you an overview of the SLC 500 programmable controller
system
Refer to publication 1747-RM001, SLC 500 Instruction Set Reference
Manual for the SLC 500 instruction set and for application examples
to show the instruction set in use. Refer to your programming
software user documentation for more information on programming
your SLC 500 programmable controller.
1
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
2
Preface
Related Documentation
The following documents contain additional information concerning
Rockwell Automation products. To obtain a copy, contact your local
Rockwell Automation office or distributor.
For
Read this Document
Document Number
An overview of the SLC 500 family of products.
Details on the latest operating system upgrade to
the SLC 5/03 and SLC 5/04 Processors.
SLC 500 System Overview
SLC 5/03 and SLC 5/04
Processors Firmware/Operating
System Upgrade Installation
Instructions
SLC5/05 Processor
Firmware/Operating System
ControlFlash Upgrade Installation
Instructions
SLC 500 Instruction Set Reference
Manual
Installation & Operation Manual
for Fixed Hardware Style
Programmable Controllers
Allen-Bradley Hand-Held
Terminal User Manual
1747-SO001
1747-IN007
Getting Started Guide for HHT
1747-NM009
Advanced Interface Converter
(AIC+) User Manual
1761-6.4
DeviceNet™ Interface User
Manual
MicroLogix Ethernet Interface
User Manual
DF1 Protocol and Command Set
Reference Manual
System Design for Control of
Electrical Noise
Allen-Bradley Programmable
Controller Grounding and Wiring
Guidelines
1761-6.5
Information on SLC 5/05 ControlFlash upgrade.
In-depth information on the SLC Instruction Set.
A description on how to install and use your Fixed
SLC 500 programmable controller.
A procedural and reference manual for technical
personnel who use an HHT to develop control
applications.
An introduction to HHT for first-time users,
containing basic concepts but focusing on simple
tasks and exercises, and allowing the reader to
begin programming in the shortest time possible.
A description on how to install and connect an
AIC+. This manual also contains information on
network wiring.
Information on how to install, configure, and
commission a DNI.
Information on using the 1761-NET-ENI Ethernet
Interface.
Information on DF1 open protocol.
Information on reducing electrical noise.
In-depth information on grounding and wiring
Allen-Bradley® programmable controllers.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
1747-IN019
1747-RM001
1747-6.21
1747-NP002
1761-UM006
1770-6.5.16
GMC-RM001
1770-4.1
Preface
3
For
Read this Document
Document Number
A description of important differences between
solid-state programmable controller products and
hard-wired electromechanical devices.
An article on wire sizes and types for grounding
electrical equipment.
A glossary of industrial automation terms and
abbreviations.
Application Considerations for
Solid-State Controls
SGI-1.1
National Electrical Code - Published by the
National Fire Protection Association of Boston, MA.
Allen-Bradley Industrial
AG-7.1
Automation Glossary
If you would like a manual, you can:
• download a free electronic version from the internet at
www.theautomationbookstore.com
• purchase a printed manual by:
– contacting your local distributor or Rockwell Automation
representative
– visiting www.theautomationbookstore.com
– calling 1.800.963.9548 (USA/Canada) or 001.330.725.1574
(Outside USA/Canada)
Common Techniques Used
in this Manual
The following conventions are used throughout this manual:
Rockwell Automation
Support
Rockwell Automation tests all of our products to ensure that they are
fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility.
• Bulleted lists such as this one provide information, not
procedural steps.
• Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical
information.
• Italic type is used for emphasis.
If you are experiencing installation or startup problems, please review
the troubleshooting information contained in this publication first. If
you need technical assistance to get your module up and running,
please contact Customer Support (see the table below); our trained
technical specialists are available to help.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
4
Preface
If the product is not functioning and needs to be returned, contact
your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number
to your distributor in order to complete the return process.
Phone
United
States/Canada
1.440.646.5800
Outside United
States/Canada
You can access the phone number for your country via
the Internet:
1. Go to http://support.rockwellautomation.com/
2. Under Contacting Customer Support and Other
Countries, click on Click here
Internet
Worldwide
Go to http://support.rockwellautomation.com/
Your Questions or Comments on this Manual
If you find a problem with this manual, or you have any suggestions
for how this manual could be made more useful to you, please
contact us at the address below:
Rockwell Automation
Automation Control and Information Group
Technical Communication, Dept. A602V
P.O. Box 2086
Milwaukee, WI 53201-2086
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Chapter
1
Quick Start for Experienced Users
This chapter can help you to get started using the SLC® 500 Modular
Processors. We base the procedures here on the assumption that you
have an understanding of SLC 500 products. You should understand
electronic process control and be able to interpret the ladder logic
instructions required to generate the electronic signals that control
your application.
Because it is a start-up guide for experienced users, this chapter does
not contain detailed explanations about the procedures listed. It does,
however, reference other chapters in this book where you can get
more information.
If you have any questions or are unfamiliar with the terms used or
concepts presented in the procedural steps, always read the
referenced chapters and other recommended documentation before
trying to apply the information.
This chapter:
•
•
•
•
tells you what tools and equipment you need
lists how to install and wire your power supply
lists how to install and apply power to your processor
lists how to establish communications with the processor
• describes how to return the SLC® 5/03, SLC® 5/04, and
SLC® 5/05 processors to initial factory conditions if required
1
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
1-2
Quick Start for Experienced Users
Required Tools and
Equipment
Have the following tools and equipment ready:
• medium blade screwdriver
• programming equipment
• compatible communication cable and/or interface (The table
below indicates with an "X", which cables are compatible with
the SLC 5/01 through 5/05 processors.)
Processor
SLC 5/01
SLC 5/02
SLC 5/03
SLC 5/04
1747-PIC
X
X
X
1747-UIC
X(1)
X(1)
X(1)(4)
X(4)
X(4)
X
X
X
1747-CP3
1747-KTX, -PKTX
X(2)
X(2)
X(2)
X(5)
1747-PCMK
X(3)
X(3)
X(3)
X(6)
10Base-T EtherNet
X
(1) requires 1747-C13 cable
(2) requires 1784-CP14 cable
(3) requires 1784-PCM4 cable
(4) requires 1747-CP3 cable
(5) requires 1784-CP13 cable
(6) requires 1784-PCM6 cable
Procedures
1.
Check the contents of the shipping box.
Unpack the shipping boxes making sure that the contents include:
• SLC 500 Modular Processor
– installation instructions (Publication 1747-5.25 or 1747-IN009)
• SLC 500 Modular Chassis (Catalog Numbers 1746-A4, 1746-A7, 1746-A10, or
1746-A13)
– installation instructions (Publication Number 1746-IN016)
• SLC 500 Modular Power Supplies (Catalog Numbers 1746-P1, 1746-P2,
1746-P3, 1746-P4, 1746-P5, 1746-P6, or 1746-P7)
– installation instructions (Publication Number 1746-IN004)
If the contents are incomplete, call your local Rockwell Automation representative
for assistance.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
SLC 5/05
Reference
Quick Start for Experienced Users
2.
Install the power supply.
1-3
Reference
Follow the steps below:
1. Align the circuit board of the power supply with the card guides on the left
side of the chassis, and slide the power supply in until it is flush with the
chassis.
Chapter 6
(Installing Your
Hardware Components)
2. Fasten the power supply to the chassis.
Use these screws to fasten the power supply to the chassis.
1.2 Nm (11 in-lbs.) maximum torque
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
1-4
3.
Quick Start for Experienced Users
Make jumper selection for 120/240V ac on 1746-P1, 1746-P2, and 1746-P4 power supplies.
Place the input voltage jumper to match the input voltage. This does not apply to
the 1746-P3, -P5, -P6, or -P7 which do not have jumpers.
Set the input jumper before applying power. Hazardous voltage is
present on exposed pins when power is applied; contact with the
pin may cause injury to personnel.
ATTENTION
!
Catalog Numbers 1746-P1 and -P2
Jumper Selection
POWER
Catalog Number 1746-P4
Jumper Selection
85-132 VAC
Fuse
100/120 Volts
200/240 Volts
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
170-250 VAC
POWER
Reference
Chapter 6
(Installing Your
Hardware
Components)
Quick Start for Experienced Users
4.
Wire power to the power supply.
ATTENTION
1-5
Reference
Turn off incoming power before connecting wires. Failure to
do so could cause injury to personnel and/or equipment.
Chapter 6
(Installing Your
Hardware
Components)
!
Connect incoming power.
1746-P1 and -P2
1746-P3
NOT USED
PWR OUT +24V dc
User Power
PWR OUT COM
User Power
NOT USED
+24V dc
120/240V ac
Incoming Power
V ac NEUT
CHASSIS GROUND
Incoming
Power
1746-P4
User Power
dc NEUT
CHASSIS GROUND
1746-P5
PWR OUT +24V dc
PWR OUT COM
PWR OUT +24V dc
User Power
PWR OUT COM
+125V dc
85 to 132V ac
JUMPER
Incoming
Power
dc NEUT
CHASSIS GROUND
170 to 250V ac
1746-P6
L1: 85 to 132/170 to 250V ac
Incoming Power
L2: NEUTRAL
PWR OUT +24V dc
User Power
Incoming
Power
CHASSIS GROUND
1746-P7
NOT USED
NOT USED
+12/24V dc
Incoming
Power
dc NEUT
CHASSIS GROUND
PWR OUT COM
+48V dc
dc NEUT
CHASSIS GROUND
IMPORTANT
Terminal screws on the 1746-P1, -P2, -P3,
-P5, -P6, and -P7 should be tightened with a
maximum torque of 1 Nm (8.8 in-lbs.).
Terminal screws on the 1746-P4 should be
tightened with a max torque of 0.8 Nm
(7 in-lbs.).
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
1-6
5.
Quick Start for Experienced Users
Install the processor.
IMPORTANT
Reference
If your processor has a battery — the battery is an option for the
SLC 5/01 (1747-L511) processor — make sure it is connected before
installing your processor into the chassis. This provides memory
backup for your processor should the controller power supply fail.
Chapter 2
(Selecting Your
Hardware
Components)
Make sure system power is off. Then insert the processor into the 1746 chassis.
IMPORTANT
The SLC 500 Modular Processor must be inserted into the left slot
(slot 0), as shown below. Remove the protective label on the
power supply after installing the processor.
Module Release
Card
Guide
Protective
Label
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Chapter 6
(Installing Your
Hardware
Components)
Quick Start for Experienced Users
6.
Apply power to the processor.
Reference
1. Energize the chassis power supply.
Chapter 8
(Starting Up Your
Control System)
2. Check the chassis power supply and processor LEDs. The power LED on the
power supply should be on and the fault LED on the processor should be
flashing.
Chapter 10
(Troubleshooting)
Follow the steps below:
Power supply and SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 LEDs
POWER
RUN
1-7
Power supply and SLC 5/03 and SLC 5/04 LEDs
COMM
CPU FAULT
FORCED I/O
BATTERY LOW
POWER
RUN
FORCE
FLT
BATT
DH485
RS232
The RUN LED on the SLC 5/01 processor is
actually labeled “PC RUN.” Also, the SLC 5/01
processor does not have a COMM LED.
The DH485 LED on the SLC 5/03 processor is
labeled “DH+” on the SLC 5/04 processor.
Power supply and SLC 5/05 LEDs
Refer to the following key to determine the
status of the LED indicators:
POWER RUN
FORCE
Indicates the LED is off.
FLT
BATT
ENET
RS232
Indicates the LED is on.
Indicates the LED is FLASHING.
Status of LED does not matter.
7.
Load your software.
Refer to your software package’s documentation.
Reference
—
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
1-8
8.
Quick Start for Experienced Users
Establish communications to the processor.
Reference
Follow the steps below:
Refer to the following to establish communications between the processor and your
personal computer.
Chapter 8
(Starting Up Your
Control System)
Processor
Procedure
SLC 5/01
Connect 1747-PIC from the processor to your personal computer serial
port or connect 1747-UIC from the processor to your personal computer
USB port, or use a 1784-KTX, -PKTX, or -PMCK interface.
SLC 5/02
Connect 1747-PIC from the processor to your personal computer serial
port or connect 1747-UIC from the processor to your personal computer
USB port, or use a 1784-KTX, -PKTX, or -PMCK interface.
SLC 5/03
Connect 1747-PIC from the processor to your personal computer serial
port or connect 1747-UIC from the processor to your personal computer
USB port, or use a 1784-KTX, -PKTX, or -PMCK interface, or a 1747-CP3
cable from channel 0 of the processor to the personal computer serial
port.
SLC 5/04
Connect a 1747-CP3 cable from channel 0 of the processor to the personal
computer serial port or connect 1747-UIC from channel 0 of the processor
to your personal computer USB port, or use a 1784-KTX, -PKTX, or -PCMK
interface.
SLC 5/05
Connect a 1747-CP3 cable from channel 0 of the processor to the personal
computer serial port, or connect 1747-UIC from channel 0 of the processor
to your personal computer USB port. For Ethernet connection, connect
channel 1 of the processor and the PC Ethernet Card to an Ethernet hub
using 10Base-T compatible cable.(1)
(1) Ethernet IP address must first be set via BOOTP or an RS-232 connection. See Appendix B for more information.
1. Set the communication parameters of software to match the
default parameters of the processor:
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, and
SLC 5/03 Channel 1
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and
SLC 5/05 Only
SLC 5/04 Only
DH-485
19.2K baud
Node Address = 1
Channel 0 configuration:
DF1 Full Duplex
No Handshaking
19.2K baud
CRC Error Check
Duplicate Packet Detect On
No Parity
1 Stop Bit
Channel 1 configuration:
DH+
57.6K baud
Node Address = 1
Quick Start for Experienced Users
9.
(Optional) Return the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 processor to initial factory conditions.
Use this procedure if the communication channels are shut down due to
configuration parameters, or if you absolutely cannot establish communications with
the processor.
1-9
Reference
Chapter 10
(Troubleshooting)
If you return the processor to the initial factory
conditions, the communication configurations are
returned to their default settings and the user
program is cleared.
ATTENTION
!
1. Remove power from the SLC 500 power supply.
2. Remove the processor from the chassis.
3. Disconnect the battery by removing the battery connector from
its socket.
4. Locate the VBB and GND connections on the right side of the
motherboard.
5. Place a small bladed screwdriver across the VBB and GND
connections and hold for 60 seconds. This returns the processor
to the initial factory conditions.
VBB
GND
SLC 5/03 (1747-L531 and 1747-L532)
Keyswitch
GND
Mother Board
VBB
Mother Board
Right Side View
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
1-10
Quick Start for Experienced Users
SLC 5/04 (1747-L541, 1747-L542, and 1747-L543)
SLC 5/05 (1747-L551, 1747-L552, and 1747-L553)
GND
VBB
Keyswitch
GND VBB
Mother Board
Mother Board
Right Side View
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Chapter
2
Selecting Your Hardware Components
This chapter provides general information on what your SLC 500
controller can do, an overview of the modular control system, and
special considerations for controller installations. It also explains how
to select:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
chassis
modular processors
discrete I/O modules
specialty I/O modules
power supplies
enclosures
operator interfaces
memory modules
isolation transformers
This chapter does not provide you with all the information that you
need to select a complete SLC 500 control system. To do this, we
recommend that you use the latest version of the system overview,
SLC 500 Programmable Controllers and I/O Modules, Publication
Number 1747-SO001.
1
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
2-2
Selecting Your Hardware Components
European Union Directive
Compliance
If this product has the CE mark it is approved for installation within
the European Union and EEA regions. It has been designed and tested
to meet the following directives.
EMC Directive
This product is tested to meet Council Directive 89/336/EEC
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and the following standards, in
whole or in part, documented in a technical construction file:
• EN 50081-2
EMC - Generic Emission Standard, Part 2 - Industrial
Environment
• EN 50082-2
EMC - Generic Immunity Standard, Part 2 - Industrial
Environment
This product is intended for use in an industrial environment.
Low Voltage Directive
This product is tested to meet Council Directive 73/23/EEC Low
Voltage, by applying the safety requirements of EN 61131-2
Programmable Controllers, Part 2 – Equipment Requirements and
Tests.
For specific information required by EN61131-2, see the appropriate
sections in this publication, as well as the following Allen-Bradley
publications:
• Industrial Automation, Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for
Noise Immunity, publication 1770-4.1
• Automation Systems Catalog, publication B113
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Overview of Your Modular
Control System
The basic modular controller consists of a chassis, power supply,
processor (CPU), Input/Output (I/O modules), and an operator
interface device for programming and monitoring. The figure below
shows typical hardware components for a modular controller.
Modular Controller
Modular Hardware Components
Power
Supply
Processor
Module
2-3
Input
Module
Output
Module
Combination
I/O Module
OR
Programming PC
Programming
Terminal
Chassis
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
2-4
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Principles of Machine Control
You enter a ladder logic program into the controller using the
software. The logic program is based on your electrical relay print
diagrams. It contains instructions that direct control of your
application.
With the ladder logic program entered into the controller, placing the
controller in the Run mode initiates an operating cycle. The
controller’s operating cycle consists of a series of operations
performed sequentially and repeatedly, unless altered by your ladder
logic program.
➄
Overhead
➀
Service
Comms
➃
1. input scan - the time required for the controller to scan and read all
input data; typically accomplished within a few milliseconds.
Input
Scan
➁
Operation
Cycle
Program
Scan
2. program scan - the time required for the processor to execute the
instruction in the program. The program scan time varies
depending on the instruction used and each instruction’s status
during the scan time.
Output
Scan
➂
IMPORTANT
Subroutine and interrupt instructions within your logic
program may cause deviations in the way the
operating cycle is sequenced.
3. output scan - the time required for the controller to scan and write
all output data; typically accomplished within a few milliseconds.
4. service communications - the part of the operating cycle in which
communication takes place with other devices, such as an HHT or
a personal computer.
5. housekeeping and overhead - time spent on memory
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Selecting Modular
Processors
2-5
SLC 500 modular processors are designed to meet a wide range of
applications, from small stand-alone to large distributed systems and
from simple to complex applications.
Processor Features
Memory size — The SLC 500 modular processors memory is user
configurable for either data storage or program storage. Memory size
ranges from 1K to 64K.
I/O points — The SLC 5/01 processor supports addressing of up to
3940 I/O. The SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors
support addressing of 4096 I/O. The SLC 500 modular processors are
supported by over 60 different I/O modules including digital, analog,
and intelligent I/O.
Performance — The SLC 500 modular processors are designed with
throughput performance in mind. The program scan time for a typical
instruction mix ranges from 0.9 ms/K to 8.0 ms/K depending on the
processor. I/O scan times range from 0.25 ms to 2.6 ms depending on
the processor and I/O installed in the system.
Advanced instruction support — The instructions available
depends on the processor used. The following table lists the
instructions supported by the SLC 500 modular processors.
Instruction Support
SLC 5/01
SLC 5/02
SLC 5/03
SLC 5/04
SLC 5/05
Bit
•
•
•
•
•
Timer and Controller
•
•
•
•
•
Comparison
•
•
•
•
•
Basic Math
•
•
•
•
•
Move, Copy, and Bit Shift
•
•
•
•
•
Sequencer
•
•
•
•
•
Jump and Subroutine
•
•
•
•
•
Messaging
•
•
•
•
STI
•
•
•
•
FIFO/LIFO
•
•
•
•
PID
•
•
•
•
Advanced Math and Trig
•
•
•
Indirect Addressing
•
•
•
Floating Point Math
•
•
•
ASCII
•
•
•
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
2-6
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Processor Communication Options
The SLC 500 processors support several communication options. The
following sections describe the available physical connections and
protocol options used by the SLC 500 processors.
Physical Connection Options
Ethernet (10Base-T) channel offers:
•
•
•
•
10 Mbps communication rate
ISO/IEC 8802-3STD 802.3 (RJ45) connector for 10Base-T media
TCP/IP communication protocol
built-in isolation
Data Highway Plus™ (DH+) channel offers:
• communication rates of 57.6K, 115.2K, and 230.4K baud
• maximum network length of 3,048m (10,000 ft.) at 57.6K baud
• Belden 9463 (blue hose) cable connection between nodes (daisy
chain connection)
• built-in isolation
DH-485 channel offers:
•
•
•
•
configurable isolation via the 1747-AIC or 1761-NET-AIC
maximum network length of 1219m (4,000 ft.)
RS-485 electrical specifications
Belden™ 9842 or Belden™ 3106A cable connection between
nodes (daisy-chain connection)
RS-232 channel offers:
• communication rates up to 19.2K baud (38.4K baud SLC 5/04
and SLC 5/05)
• Maximum distance between devices is 15.24 m (50 ft.)
• RS-232C (EIA-232) electrical specifications
• modem support
• built-in isolation
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-7
The table below summarizes the processor channel connections.
Processor
Physical Communication Channel
DH-485
RS-232
DH+
Ethernet
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
DH+ protocol
—
—
—
SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 DH-485 protocol
SLC 5/03
Channel 0
Channel 1
SLC 5/04
Channel 0
Channel 1
SLC 5/05
Channel 0
Channel 1
—
DH-485(1), DF1 Full-Duplex, DF1 Half-Duplex
Master/Slave, and ASCII protocols
DH-485 protocol
—
—
DH-485(1), DF1 Full-Duplex, DF1 Half-Duplex
Master/Slave, and ASCII protocols
—
—
—
DH-485(1), DF1 Full-Duplex, DF1 Half-Duplex
Master/Slave, and ASCII protocols
—
—
—
Ethernet TCP/IP protocol
(1) A 1761-NET-AIC is required when connecting to a DH-485 network.
Protocol Options
Ethernet TCP/IP Protocol — Standard Ethernet, utilizing the TCP/IP
protocol, is used as the backbone network in many office and
industrial buildings. Ethernet is a local area network that provides
communication between various devices at 10 Mbps. This network
provides the same capabilities as DH+ or DH-485 networks, plus:
• SNMP support for Ethernet network management
• optional dynamic configuration of IP addresses using a BOOTP
utility
• SLC 5/05 Ethernet data rate up to 40 times faster than SLC 5/04
DH+ messaging
• ability to message entire SLC 5/05 data files
• much greater number of nodes on a single network possible
compared to DH-485 (32) and DH+ (64)
Data Highway Plus (DH+) Protocol — The Data Highway Plus
protocol is used by the PLC-5 family of processors and the SLC 5/04
processor. This protocol is similar to DH-485, except that it can
support up to 64 devices (nodes) and runs at faster communication
(baud) rates.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
2-8
Selecting Your Hardware Components
DH-485 Protocol — The SLC 500 processors have a DH-485 channel
that supports the DH-485 communication network. This network is a
multi-master, token-passing network protocol capable of supporting
up to 32 devices (nodes). This protocol allows:
• monitoring data and processor status, along with program
uploading and downloading of any device on the network from
one location
• SLC processors to pass data to each other (peer-to-peer
communication)
• operator interface devices on the network to access data from
any SLC processor on the network
DF1 Full-Duplex Protocol — DF1 Full-Duplex protocol (also
referred to as DF1 point-to-point protocol) allows two devices to
communicate with each other at the same time. This protocol allows:
• transmission of information across modems (dial-up, leased line,
radio, or direct cable connections)
• communication to occur between Allen-Bradley products and
third-party products
DF1 Half-Duplex Protocol (Master and Slave) — DF1 Half-Duplex
protocol provides a multi-drop single master/multiple slave network
capable of supporting up to 255 devices (nodes). This protocol also
provides modem support and is ideal for SCADA (Supervisory Control
and Data Acquisition) applications because of the network capability.
ASCII Protocol — The ASCII protocol provides connection to other
ASCII devices, such as bar code readers, weigh scales, serial printers,
and other intelligent devices.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-9
The following table summarizes the communication options for the
SLC 500 processor family.
Communication
Protocol
Processor
SLC 5/01
DH-485 peer-to-peer receive only
DH-485 via RS232
port
DF1 via RS232 port
(full-duplex or
half-duplex master
or slave)
ASCII via RS232 port
Data Highway Plus
(DH+)
Ethernet
DeviceNet
ControlNet
SLC 5/02
SLC 5/03
receive and initiate
receive and initiate
—
receive only(1)
—
receive only(1)
—
receive only(2)
—
receive only(2)
SLC 5/04
SLC 5/05
—
—
receive and initiate(9)
receive and initiate(9)
receive and initiate(9)
receive and initiate
receive and initiate
receive and initiate
receive and initiate
receive and initiate
receive and initiate
receive and initiate(5)
receive and initiate
receive and initiate(5)
receive and initiate(6)
receive and initiate(6)
receive and initiate
—
—
—
receive and
initiate(3)
receive and
initiate(3)(7)
receive and
initiate(3)(7)
receive and
initiate(3)(7)
—
receive and
initiate(4)
receive and
initiate(4)(8)
receive and
initiate(4)(8)
receive and
initiate(4)(8)
(1) A 1747-KE or 1770-KF3 is required to bridge from DF1 (full-duplex or half-duplex slave only) to DH485.
(2) A 1785-KA5 is required to bridge from DH+ to DH-485.
(3) A 1747-SDN module is required for scanning I/O and for explicit messaging on DeviceNet.
(4) A 1747-SCNR module is required for scanning I/O and for explicit messaging on ControlNet.
(5) Either a 1785-KA5 is required to bridge from DH+ to DH-485 or the SLC 5/04’s channel-to-channel passthru feature may be used to bridge between DH+ and DH-485 or
between DH+ and DF1 full-duplex (DH+ to DF1 full-duplex passthru available starting with OS401). Another option is to use the 1785-KE to bridge between DH+ and DF1
full-duplex or DH+ and DF1 half-duplex master/slave network.
(6) A 1761-NET-ENI is required to bridge from DF1 full-duplex to Ethernet.
(7) A 1761-NET-DNI is required to bridge from DF1 to DeviceNet.
(8) A 1747-KFC15 module or 1770-KFC15 interface is required to bridge from DF1 to ControlNet.
(9) If using 1747-AIC for isolation, connect to DH-485 network using 1747-PIC. If using a 1761-NET-AIC for isolation, connect directly to DH-485 network with 1747-CP3 serial
cable (or equivalent RS-232 null-modem cable).
TIP
The 1785-KA5 and 1785-KE modules require use of a
1771-series chassis and power supply.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
2-10
Selecting Your Hardware Components
SLC 500 System Test General Specifications
The table below lists SLC 500 system test specifications.
Description
Specification
Industry Standard
Temperature
Operating: 0°C to +60°C (+32°F to +140°F)
Not Applicable
Storage: -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F)
Not Applicable
Humidity
5 to 95% without condensation
Not Applicable
Vibration
Operating: 2.5G at 5 to 2000 Hz
Not Applicable
Non-operating: 5Gs at 5 to 2000 Hz
Not Applicable
Operating: (all modules except relay contact)
30.0Gs (3 pulses, 11 ms)
Not Applicable
Operating: (relay contact modules - OW, OX, IO combo)
10.0Gs (3 pulses, 11 ms)
Not Applicable
Non-operating: 50.0Gs (3 pulses, 11 ms)
Not Applicable
Portable, 2.268 kg (5 lbs) or less at 0.762 m (30 in.)
(six drops)
Not Applicable
Portable, 2.268 kg (5 lbs) or more at 0.1016 m (4 in.)
(three flat drops)
Not Applicable
Showering Arc: 1.5 KV
NEMA ICS 2-230/NEMA ICS 3-304
Surge Withstand Capability: 3 KV
IEEE Std. 472-1974/ANSI
C37.90/90A-1974
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD): 15 KV,
100 pF/1.5 Kohm model
Internal Allen-Bradley standard(1)
Radiated Electromagnetic Susceptibility: 5W
walkie-talkie at 464.5 MHz and 153.05 MHz
Internal Allen-Bradley standard(1)
Dielectric Withstand: 1500V ac
UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 142
Isolation between Communication Circuits: 500V dc
Not Applicable
Isolation between Backplane and I/Os: 1500V ac
Not Applicable
Flammability and Electrical Ignition: UL94V-0
Not Applicable
UL listed/CSA approved
Class 1, Groups A, B, C or D, Division 2
CE compliant for all applicable directives
C-Tick marked for all applicable acts
Not Applicable
Shock
Free Fall (drop test)
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Safety
Certification
(1) Internal Allen-Bradley standards are based on Allen-Bradley’s extensive experience in industrial controls. They are also based partly on industry and/or military
specifications.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-11
Processor General Specifications
The table below lists general specifications for SLC 500 modular
processors.
Specification
(1747-)
SLC 5/01
SLC 5/02
SLC 5/03
SLC 5/04
SLC 5/05
L511
Program Memory
(words)
1K
L514
L524
L531
L532
L541
L542
L543
L551
L552
L553
4K
4K
8K
16K
16K
32K
64K
16K
32K
64K
I/O Capacity
3940 Discrete
4096 Discrete
Remote I/O Capacity
Not Applicable
Processor memory and chassis power limit up to 4096 inputs and 4096 outputs
Maximum
Chassis/Slots
3 Chassis/30 Slots of I/O
Standard RAM
Capacitor - Lithium Battery
2 weeks(1) 2 years
Optional
Lithium
Battery Capacitor - 30 minutes minimum
5 years
Memory Back-up
Options
EEPROM
LED Indicators
Run
CPU Fault
Forced I/O
Battery Low
Power Supply
Loading
Flash EPROM
Run
CPU Fault
Forced I/O
Battery Low
COMM
Run
CPU Fault
Forced I/O
Battery Low
RS-232
DH-485
Run
CPU Fault
Forced I/O
Battery Low
RS-232
DH+
350 mA at 5V dc
500 mA at 5V dc
1A at 5V dc
105 mA at 24V dc
175 mA at 24V
dc
Clock/Calendar
Accuracy
Not Applicable
±54 sec./month at +25°C (+77°F); ±81 sec./month at +60°C (+140°F)
Program Scan
Hold-up Time after
Loss of Power)
20 milliseconds to 3 seconds (dependent on power supply loading
Noise Immunity)
NEMA Standard ICS 2-230
Run
CPU Fault
Forced I/O
Battery Low
RS-232
Ethernet
1A at 5V dc
(2)
0 mA at 24V dc
Temperature Rating
Operating: 0°C to +60°C (+32°F to +140°F); Storage: -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F)
Humidity
5 to 95% without condensation
Shock (operating)
30G
Vibrations
Displacement:.015 in., peak-to-peak at 5 - 57 Hz
0 mA at 24V dc
Acceleration: 2.5Gs at 57 - 2000 Hz
Certification
UL listed/CSA approved; Class 1, Groups A, B, C or D, Division 2; CE compliant for all applicable directives
C-Tick marked for all applicable acts
(1) See Capacitor Memory Backup vs. Temperature Curve on page 2-12.
(2) SLC 5/04 processors manufactured prior to April 2002 draw 200mA at 24V dc. Check your label to verify your processor’s current draw.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
2-12
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Memory Backup for the 1747-L511, SLC 5/01 Processor
The curve below illustrates the ability of the memory back-up
capacitor to maintain the contents of the RAM in a 1747-L511. To back
up the memory for a longer period of time, a lithium battery, Catalog
Number 1747-BA, is required.
Capacitor Memory Back-up Time VS Temperature
30
25
20
Time
(Days)
15
10
5
0
0
Selecting Discrete I/O
Modules
5
(41˚F)
10
(50˚F)
15
(59˚F)
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
20
25
(68˚F) (77˚F) (86˚F) (95˚F) (104˚F) (113˚F) (122˚F) (131˚F) (140˚F)
Temperature °C (°F)
There are three types of discrete I/O modules: input, output, and
combination. They are available in a wide variety of densities
including 4, 8, 16, and 32 point and can interface to AC, DC, and TTL
voltage levels. Output modules are available with solid-state AC,
solid-state DC, and relay contact type outputs.
For a complete listing of discrete I/O modules and specifications,
contact your Allen-Bradley sales office for the latest product data
entitled Discrete Input and Output Modules, publication 1746-2.35.
Selecting Specialty I/O
Modules
The SLC 500 family offers specialty I/O modules that enhance your
control system. Modules range in function from analog interface to
motion control, from communication to high-speed counting.
For a complete listing of specialty I/O modules and their
specifications, contact your Allen-Bradley sales office for the latest
system overview entitled SLC 500 Programmable Controllers and I/O
Modules, publication 1747-SO001, or for a related technical data.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Selecting Power Supplies
2-13
To select a power supply, you need the following documents:
• power supply worksheet (See F) one for each chassis
• SLC 500 Programmable Controllers and I/O Modules, publication
1747-SO001, or SLC 500 Modular Chassis and Power Supplies
Technical Data, publication number 1746-TD003.
When configuring a modular system, you must have a power supply
for each chassis. Careful system configuration will result in the best
performance. Excessive loading of the power supply outputs can
cause a power supply shutdown or premature failure.
There are three different AC power supplies and four DC power
supplies. For AC power supplies, the 120/240V selection is made by a
jumper. Place the jumper to match the input voltage.
ATTENTION
!
Ensure that the power supply jumper is in the correct
position before supplying power to the SLC 500
system or personal injury or damage to the system
may result.
SLC power supplies have an LED that illuminates when the power
supply is functioning properly. Page 2-14 lists general specifications
for the power supplies.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
2-14
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Power Supply Specifications
Description
1746-P1
1746-P2
1746-P3
1746-P4
1746-P5
1746-P6
Line Voltage
85 to 132/170 to 265V ac
47 to 63 Hz
19.2 to
28.8V dc
85 to 132/170
to 250V ac
47 to 63 Hz
90 to
146V dc
30 to 60V dc 10 to 30 V dc
Typical Line
Power
Requirement(1)
135 VA
90 VA
150 VA
85 VA
100 VA
Maximum
Inrush Current
20A
20A
20A
45A
20A
Internal
Current
Capacity
2A at 5V dc
0.46A at
24V dc
5A at 5V dc
0.96A at
24V dc
3.6A at 5V dc
0.87A at
24V dc
10.0A at 5V dc
2.88A at
24V dc(3)
5.0A at 5V dc
0.96A at 24V dc
180 VA
1746-P7
12V dc input: 50 VA
24V dc input: 75 VA
20A
20A (required for
turn-on)
12V dc input:
2.0A at 5V dc
0.46A at 24V dc
24V dc input:
3.6A at 5V dc
0.87A at 24V dc
See chart on page
2-15.
Fuse
Protection(2)
1746-F1 or
equivalent:
250V-3A Fuse,
Nagasawa
ULCS-61ML-3
or
BUSSMANN
AGC 3
1746-F2 or
equivalent:
250V-3A Fuse,
SANO SOC
SD4 or
BUSSMANN
AGC 3
1746-F3 or
equivalent:
125V-5A Fuse
Nagasawa
ULCS-61ML-5
or BUSSMAN
AGC 5
24V dc User
Power
Current
Capacity
200 mA
200 mA
Not Applicable 1A(3)
200 mA
Not applicable
24V dc User
Power
Voltage Range
18 to 30V dc
18 to 30V dc
Not Applicable 20.4 to
27.6V dc
18 to 30V dc
Not applicable
Ambient
Operating
Temperature
0°C to +60°C (+32°F to +140°F) Current capacity
derated 5% above +55°C.
Storage
Temperature
-40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F)
Humidity
Rating
5-95% (non-condensing)
Wiring
two #14 AWG wires per terminal (maximum)
Certification
UL listed, C-UL or CSA certified, CE compliant for all applicable directives,
Class I Division 2 Hazardous Environment Certification
C-Tick marked for all applicable acts
Non-replaceable fuse
0°C to +60°C
(+32°F to
+140°F) no
derating
0°C to +60°C (+32°F to +140°F) Current capacity
derated 5% above +55°C.
(1) Refer to Appendix F to determine line power requirements for your configuration.
(2) Fuse is intended to guard against fire hazard due to short circuit conditions and may not protect the supply from damage under overload conditions.
(3) The combination of all output power (5 volt backplane, 24 volt backplane, and 24 volt user source) cannot exceed 70 Watts.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-15
1746-P7 Current Capacity
24V dc
Output
Current
5V dc
Output
Current
.87A
3.6A
0.625A
2.64A
0.46A
2.0A
Input Voltage (dc)
10V
12.2V 15V
19.2V
30V
Example for Selecting Power Supplies
Select a power supply for chassis 1 and chassis 2 in the control system
below.
Chassis 1
Chassis 2
DH-485 Network
?
?
Personal
Computer
HHT
1747-PIC
1747-AIC
Chassis 1
Slot
0
1 2 3
1747-AIC
Slot Numbers
Description
Catalog
Number
Power Supply at Power Supply at
5V dc (Amps)
24V dc (Amps)
0
Processor Unit
1747-L511
0.350
0.105
1
Input Module
1747-IV8
0.050
0.000
2
Transistor Output
Module
1746-OB8
0.135
0.000
3
Triac Output Module
1746-OA16
0.370
0.000
Peripheral device
Hand-Held Terminal
1747-PT1
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Peripheral device
Isolated Link Coupler 1747-AIC
0.000
0.085
0.905
0.190(1)
Total Current:
(1) Power supply 1746-P1 is sufficient for Chassis #1. The “Internal Current Capacity” for this power supply is 2 Amps at 5V dc,
0.46 Amps at 24V dc.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
2-16
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Chassis 2
?
Slot
0
1
2
3 4 5 6
Slot
Numbers
Description
Catalog
Number
Power Supply
at
5V dc (Amps)
Power Supply
at
24V dc (Amps)
0
Processor Unit
1747-L514
0.350
0.105
1
Output Module
1746-OW16
0.170
0.180
2
Combination Module 1746-IO12
0.090
.070
3, 4, 5, 6
Analog Output
Modules
0.22 0
(4 x 0.055)
0.780
(4 x 0.195)
Peripheral
device
Isolated Link Coupler 1747-AIC
0.000
0.085
Peripheral
device
Interface Converter
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
0.830
1.220(1)
Total Current:
1746-NO4I
1746-PIC
(1) Power Supply 1746-P4 is sufficient for Chassis #2. The “Internal Current Capacity” for this power supply is 10
Amps at 5V dc, 2.88 Amps at 24V dc; not to exceed 70 Watts.
Example Worksheet for Selecting a 1746 Power Supply
If you have a multiple chassis system, make copies of the Power
Supply Worksheet found on page F-4. For a detailed list of device load
currents, refer to the SLC 500 Modular Chassis and Power Supplies
Technical Data, Publication Number 1746-TD003.
TIP
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Consider future system expansion when selecting a
power supply.
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-17
Procedure
1. For each slot of the chassis that contains a module, list the slot number, the catalog number of the module, and its 5V and 24V maximum currents.
Also include the power consumption of any peripheral devices that may be connected to the processor other than a DTAM, HHT, or PIC—the power
consumption of these devices is accounted for in the power consumption of the processor.
Chassis Number
Slot Number
1
Maximum Currents
Catalog Number at 5V dc
Slot
0
Slot
Slot
Slot
at 24V dc
Chassis Number
Slot Number
2
Catalog
Number
Maximum Currents
at 5V dc
1747-L511
0.350A
0.105A
Slot
0
1747-L514
1
1746-IV8
0.050A
-
Slot
1
1746-OW16
0.170A
0.180A
2
1746-OB8
0.135A
-
Slot
2
1746-NO4I
0.055A
0.195A
3
1746-OA16
0.370A
-
Slot
3
1746-NO4I
0.055A
0.195A
Slot
Slot
4
1746-NO4I
0.055A
0.195A
Slot
Slot
5
1746-NO4I
0.055A
0.195A
Slot
Slot
6
1746-IO12
0.090A
0.070A
Slot
Slot
1747-AIC
-
0.085A
0.830A
1.220A
Peripheral Device
1747-AIC
-
0.085A
0.905A
0.190A
Peripheral Device
Peripheral Device
0.350A
at 24V dc
0.105A
Peripheral Device
2. Add the loading currents of all the system
devices at 5 and 24V dc to determine the
Total Current.
2. Add the loading currents of all the
system devices at 5 and 24V dc to
determine the Total Current.
3. For 1746-P4 power supplies, calculate the total power consumption of all system devices. If you are not using a 1746-P4, go to step 4.
Current
Multiply by = Watts
Current
Multiply by = Watts
Total Current at 5V dc
0.905A
5V
4.525W
Total Current at 5V dc
0.830A
5V
4.15W
Total Current
at 24V dc
0.190A
24V
4.56W
Total Current
at 24V dc
1.220A
24V
29.28W
User Current
at 24V dc
0.500A
24V
12.00W
User Current
at 24V dc
0.500A
24V
12.00W
21.085W
Add the Watts values to determine Total Power
Add the Watts values to determine Total Power
(cannot exceed 70 Watts)
45.43W
(cannot exceed 70 Watts)
4. Choose the power supply from the list of catalog numbers shown below. Compare the Total Current required for the chassis with the Internal Current
capacity of the power supplies. Be sure that the Total Current consumption for the chassis is less than the Internal Current Capacity for the power
supply, for both 5V and 24V loads.
Catalog Number
Internal Current
Capacity
at 5V dc
at 24V dc
1746-P1
2.0A
0.46A
1746-P2
5.0A
0.96A
1746-P3
3.6A
1746-P4 (see step 3)
Catalog Number
Internal Current
Capacity
at 5V dc
at 24V dc
1746-P1
2.0A
0.46A
1746-P2
5.0A
0.96A
0.87A
1746-P3
3.6A
0.87A
10.0A
2.88A
1746-P4 (see step 3)
10.0A
2.88A
1746-P5
5.0A
0.96A
1746-P5
5.0A
0.96A
1746-P6
5.0A
0.96A
1746-P6
5.0A
0.96A
12V dc input
2.0A
0.46A
1746-P7(1)
12V dc input
2.0A
0.46A
24V dc input
3.6A
0.87A
24V dc input
3.6A
0.87A
1746-P7(1)
Required Power Supply
1746-P1
Required Power Supply
1746-P4
(1) See 1746-P7 current capacity chart on page 2-15.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
2-18
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Selecting Enclosures
The enclosure protects the equipment from atmospheric
contamination. Standards established by the National Electrical
Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) define enclosure types, based on
the degree of protection an enclosure will provide. Use a fan to
circulate the air of sealed enclosures that use convection cooling to
dissipate heat. Select a NEMA-rated enclosure that suits your
application and environment. The enclosure should be equipped with
a disconnect device. To calculate the heat dissipation of your
controller, see Appendix G.
Selecting Operator
Interfaces
Use an operator interface to program and/or monitor your SLC 500
controller. You can choose from several Allen-Bradley operator
interface devices.
Programming with a Hand-Held Terminal
Use the Hand-Held Terminal (HHT) to configure the SLC 500
controller, enter/modify a user program, download/upload programs,
monitor control operation, and test/troubleshoot. When equipped
with a battery (1747-BA), the HHT retains a user program in memory
for storage and later use.
The display area accommodates 8 lines x 40 characters. You can
display five rungs of a user program. The top row of keys are the
menu function keys.
IMPORTANT
Using the HHT, you can program the SLC 5/01 and
SLC 5/02 processors and the SLC 500 fixed
controllers. You cannot, however, program SLC 5/03,
SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 processors
Programming with a Personal Computer
Contact Rockwell Software or your local Allen-Bradley distributor for
specifications and availability of software packages available to
program the SLC 500 Modular Controllers.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-19
AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter (1761-NET-AIC)
The AIC+ advanced interface converter provides communication links
between various networked devices. It has three communication
ports: one for DH-485 and two for RS-232. The AIC+ is compatible
with a variety of SLC and MicroLogix controllers and peripherals.
DH-485 Interface Converters
1747-PIC RS-232/DH485 Interface Converter
For communication with a SLC 5/01, 5/02, or 5/03 processor, you can
use an RS-232/DH-485 Interface Convertor (Catalog Number
1747-PIC) between the computer and SLC controller. The converter
includes a 279.4 mm (11 in.) ribbon cable, already attached to the
converter, for connection to the computer serial port and a Catalog
Number 1746-C10 cable for connection to the controller.
If you are using an SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 processor, you do
not need the 1747-PIC. You can program via the RS-232 channel using
DF1 full-duplex protocol or DH485 protocol and RS-232 Program
Cable (Catalog Number 1747-CP3).
1747-UIC USB to DH485 Interface Converter
For communication with an SLC 5/01 through 5/05 processor, you can
connect the 1747-UIC between the computer’s USB port and the SLC
controller. The 1747-UIC features an RS-232 port for communications
with SLC 5/03 and higher and an RS-485 port for communications with
SLC 5/03 and lower.
Monitoring with a Data Table Access Module
The Data Table Access Module (DTAM™) is a plant floor device that
lets you access data file information, change operating modes,
monitor and clear processor faults, and transfer the user program
between RAM and an EEPROM memory module with any SLC 5/01,
5/02, or 5/03 family processor. You cannot use it to create new
programs.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
2-20
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Important features of DTAM include:
• shorthand addressing, which provides easier access to data files
• display prompts in six, user-selectable languages: English,
French, German, Italian, Spanish, and Japanese
• UL listed, CSA Certified
• NEMA type 12 and 13 enclosures
• point-to-point interface to an SLC family processor, or as a
network device on a DH-485 network
Monitoring with a PanelView™ Operator Terminal
The PanelView Operator Terminals provide operator interface
capabilities in space-saving, flat-panel designs. Offering optimum
viewing angles, these electronic operator interfaces feature pixel
graphics and high-performance functionality in both color and
monochrome displays. The PanelView Operator Terminals allow you
to enter input using function keys or a touch screen, depending upon
the model.
All PanelView Operator Terminals are available with DF1 or DH-485
(RS-232) communications capability, allowing them to communicate
directly with channel 0 on an SLC 5/03, 5/04, or 5/05 processor. The
larger versions also offer DH-485 (RJ-45), DH+, Remote I/O, Ethernet,
DeviceNet, and ControlNet network connectivity.
The PanelView 300 Micro and 300 Keypad terminals provide compact,
low-cost operator interfaces for low-end graphical or text-only
applications, each with a 3 inch (7.6 cm) diagonal LCD monochrome
graphic display, and DF1, DH-485 (RS-232) and DeviceNet (300
Keypad only) communications capability.
The PanelView 550, with its 5.5 inch (14 cm) diagonal monochrome
LCD display, and PanelView 600, with its 6 inch (15.2 cm) diagonal
TFT active matrix color display, offer keypad, keypad/touch and
touch-only versions. Both offer all networking options for maximum
flexibility in a smaller form factor.
PanelView 1000 offers keypad and touch screen terminals with 10.4
inch (26.4 cm) diagonal TFT active matrix color or electro-luminescent
grayscale displays, and all networking options.
The PanelView 1400, the largest terminal in the PanelView family, has
a 14 inch (35.6 cm) diagonal CRT color display and supports all
networking options.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Selecting a Memory
Module for the SLC 5/01 and
SLC 5/02 Processors
2-21
You can plug these optional EEPROM (Electrically Erasable
Programmable Read Only Memory) memory modules into the SLC 500
controller. With a memory module, you can:
• save the contents of the processor RAM for storage purposes
• load the contents of the EEPROM memory into the processor
RAM
Adapter sockets (1747-M5) are required when inserting EEPROMs or
UVPROMs into the programming and erasing equipment.
To program a memory module, see the Hand-Held Terminal User
Manual (Catalog Number 1747-NP002) or your programming software
user manual.
EEPROM Memory Modules
These optional memory modules provide a non-volatile memory
back-up in a convenient modular form. The modules plug into a
socket on the processor.
You can store (save) your program in the EEPROM by inserting it into
the processor and using either the Hand-Held Terminal or
programming software to download the program.
You can use an EEPROM module as a master, or you can use an
archived processor file as the source by using the software PROM
translator utility.
Adapter sockets are required when inserting memory modules into
commercially available PROM programmer. The memory module fits
into the adapter socket and then into a PROM programmer.
ATTENTION
Make sure the adapter is inserted properly into the
programming equipment or damage could result.
!
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
2-22
Selecting Your Hardware Components
The following table lists the types of memory modules that are
suitable for the SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 processors.
Use with this processor type:
Catalog
Number
Description
SLC 5/01
1747-L511
Selecting a Memory
Module for SLC 5/03,
SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
Processors
SLC 5/02
1747-L514
1747-L524
1747-M1
1K User Words EEPROM
X
X
X
1747-M2
4K User Words EEPROM
X
X
X
1747-M5
Adapter Socket
X
X
X
The memory module for the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
processors is called Flash EPROM (Flash Erasable Programmable Read
Only Memory). Flash EPROMs combine the programming versatility of
EEPROMs with the security precautions of UVPROMs. This means that
you have the option of leaving your EPROM programs write-protected
or unprotected. Write-protect the EPROM using either your software
or a PROM programmer.
The memory modules consist of a Flash EPROM mounted on a circuit
board with a connector and plastic housing.
Adapter sockets (1747-M15) are required when inserting memory
modules into commercially available PROM programmer. The
1747-M15 Series B is required for use with the 1747-M13 memory
module.
ATTENTION
!
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Make sure the adapter is inserted properly in the
programming equipment or damage could result.
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-23
See the table below for details on the Flash EPROM and adapter
socket.
Use with this processor type:
Catalog
Number
Description
SLC 5/03
SLC 5/04
SLC 5/05
1747-L531, 1747-L532
1747-L541, 1747-L542, 1747-L551, 1747-L552,
1747-L543
1747-L553
1747-M11
Series A
Supports up to 32K of user memory backup(1)
X
(OS300 or OS301)
X
(OS400)
1747-M11
Series B
Supports up to 32K of user memory backup(1)
X
(OS302 or higher)
X
(OS401 or higher)
X
1747-M12
Supports up to 64K of user memory backup(1)
X
(OS302 or higher)
X
(OS401 or higher)
X
1747-M13
Supports up to 64K of user memory backup
X
(Series C
OS302 or higher)
X
(Series C
OS401 or higher)
X
(Series C
OS501 or higher)
(1) Discontinued/superseded by 1747-M13
To program a memory module, refer to your programming software
user manual or help resource. The basic procedure is as follows:
1. Set the Memory Module Configuration Bits (S:1/10 to S:1/12) in
your Offline program file. Refer to SLC 500 Instruction Set
Reference Manual publication number 1747-RM001 for details on
the Memory Module Configuration Bits.
2. Download your program file to your processor.
3. Go online with the processor and burn the program to the
EEPROM Memory Module (per the instructions outlined in your
programming software user manual or help resource).
EEPROM Burning Options
You can burn a program into an EEPROM memory module using a
processor that is the same or different from the one used to run the
program. When burning EEPROMs, keep the following conditions in
mind:
• The processor burning the EEPROM must be of the same type
and have the same OS version or lower than the target
processor.
• The program size cannot exceed the processor memory size. For
instance, an SLC 5/01 4K processor can burn an EEPROM for a
SLC 5/01 1K processor as long as the program does not exceed
1K.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
2-24
Selecting Your Hardware Components
• The I/O and chassis configuration of the burning processor does
not have to match the I/O configuration of the program being
burned.
• You do not have to enter the Run mode before burning an
EEPROM. If the run mode is entered and the chassis
configuration does not match, a major fault will occur. If you
burn an EEPROM while in the fault mode, the fault will also be
saved in the EEPROM.
The following table summarizes the above conditions as to the type of
processor you can use to burn EEPROMs for other processors.
To burn EEPROMs for these processors:
Use these
processors
SLC
5/01
(1K)
SLC
5/01
(4K)
SLC 5/01 (1K)
•
1K max.
SLC 5/01 (4K)
1K max.
•
SLC
5/03
(8K)
SLC
5/03
(16K)
SLC 5/03 (8K)
•
8K max.
SLC 5/03 (16K)
8K max.
•
SLC 5/02 (4K)
SLC
5/02
(4K)
SLC 5/04 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05 SLC 5/05 SLC 5/05
(16K)
(32K)
(64K)
(16K)
(32K)
(64K)
•
SLC 5/04 (16K)
•
16K max. 16K max.
SLC 5/04 (32K)
16K max.
SLC 5/04 (64K)
16K max. 32K max.
•
32K max.
•
SLC 5/05 (16K)
•
16K max. 16K max.
SLC 5/05 (32K)
16K max.
SLC 5/05 (64K)
16K max. 32K max.
•
32K max.
•
• valid combination
Selecting Isolation
Transformers
If there is high frequency conducted noise in or around your
distribution equipment, use an isolation transformer in the AC line to
the power supply. This type of transformer provides isolation from
your power distribution system and is often used as a “step down”
transformer to reduce line voltage. Any transformer used with the
controller must have a sufficient power rating for its load. This power
rating is generally expressed in voltamperes (VA).
To select an appropriate isolation transformer, calculate the power
required by the chassis power supply (or supplies if more than one
chassis in system) and any input circuits and output loads that are
connected through this transformer.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-25
You can find the power requirement (VA rating) for the chassis power
supplies in the specifications on page 2-14. The power requirement
for the input circuits is determined by the number of inputs, the
operating voltage, and the nominal input current. The power
requirement for output loads is determined by the number of outputs,
the load voltage, and load current.
For example, if you have a 1746-P1 power supply, 1746-IA16 16-point
AC input module (12 mA at 120V ac) and a 1746-OA16 16-point AC
triac output module (0.5A at 120V ac), the power consumed would
be:
135 VA + (16)(120V)(0.012A) + (16)(120V)(0.5A) = 1,118 VA
IMPORTANT
In this case, 0.5A is the maximum rating of the triac
output (at 30° C). If the load draws less than 0.5A, this
figure may be reduced accordingly. The output
portion of the VA calculation should reflect the current
requirements of selected loads.
In general, we recommend that the transformer is oversized to
provide some margin for line voltage variations and other factors.
Typically a transformer that is 25% larger than the calculated VA is
sufficient.
Most industrial environments are susceptible to power transients or
spikes. To help insure fault-free operation and protection of
equipment, use suppression devices on power line to the equipment
in addition to the isolation equipment.
Special Considerations
The recommendations given previously provide favorable operating
conditions for most controller installations. Some applications may
involve adverse conditions, such as excessive line voltage variations
and/of excessive noise, as described below. Additional measures can
be taken to minimize the effect of these conditions.
Class I, Division 2 Applications
IMPORTANT
When installing peripheral devices (for example, push
buttons, lamps) into a hazardous environment, ensure
that they are Class I, Division 2 certified, or
determined to be safe for the environment.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
2-26
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Excessive Line Voltage Variations
The best solution for excessive line voltage variation is to correct any
feeder problems in your distribution system. Where this does not
solve the line variation problem, or in certain critical applications, use
a constant voltage transformer. If you require a constant voltage
transformer, connect it to the power supply and all input devices
connected to the SLC 500 controller.
Connect output devices on the same power line, but their connection
along the power line is normally made before the constant voltage
transformer. A constant voltage transformer must have a sufficient
power rating for its load.
Excessive Noise
When operating the SLC 500 controller in an environment with a high
amount of electrical noise, give special consideration to the possibility
of electrical interference.
The following reduces the effect of electrical interference:
•
•
•
•
•
SLC 500 controller design features
proper mounting of controller within an enclosure
proper equipment grounding
proper routing of wires (power, communications, control lines)
proper suppression added to noise generating devices
Potential sources of noise include inductive loads, such as relays,
solenoids, and motor starters when operated by “hard contacts” like
push buttons or selector switches. Suppression may be necessary
when such loads are connected as output devices or when connected
to the same supply line that powers the controller.
Lack of surge suppression on inductive loads may contribute to
processor faults and sporadic operation. RAM can be corrupted (lost)
and I/O modules may appear to be faulty or reset themselves.
For extremely noisy environments, use a memory module and
program it for auto-loading on processor fault or power cycle for
quick recovery.
Selecting Surge Suppressors
Most output modules have built-in surge suppression to reduce the
effects of high voltage transients. However, you should use an
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-27
additional suppression device if an output module is being used to
control an inductive device such as:
•
•
•
•
relays
motor starters
solenoids
motors
Additional suppression is especially important if your inductive device
is in series with or parallel to a hard contact such as:
• push buttons
• selector switches
By adding a suppression device directly across the coil of an inductive
device, you reduce the effects of voltage transients caused by
interrupting the current to that inductive device and prolong the life of
the switch contacts. You also prevent electrical noise from radiating
into system wiring. The diagram below shows an output module with
a suppression device.
+ DC or L1
VAC/VDC
Out 0
Snubber
Out 1
Out 2
AC or DC
Output Module
Out 3
Out 4
Out 5
Out 6
Out 7
COM
DC COM or L2
If you connect an SLC 500 controller triac output to control an
inductive load, use varistors to suppress noise. Choose a varistor that
is appropriate for the application. Rockwell Automation recommends
the following surge suppressors for triac outputs when switching 120V
ac inductive loads:
• Harris MOV, part number V220 MA2A, or
• Allen-Bradley MOV, Catalog Number 599-K04 or 599-KA04,
Series C or later.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
2-28
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Consult the varistor manufacturer’s data sheet when selecting a
varistor for your application.
ATTENTION
!
Damage could occur to SLC 500 triac outputs if you
use suppressors having RC networks. Allen-Bradley
AC surge suppressors not recommended for use with
triacs include Catalog Numbers 199-FSMA1,
199-FSMA2, 1401-N10, and 700-N24.
Allen-Bradley surge suppressors recommended for use with
Allen-Bradley relays, contactors, and starters are shown in the table
below.
Device
Coil Voltage
Suppressor Catalog No.
Bulletin 509 Motor Starter
Bulletin 509 Motor Starter
120V ac
240V ac
599-K04 (1)
599-KA04(1)
Bulletin 100 Conductor
Bulletin 100 Conductor
120V ac
240V ac
199-FSMA1 (2)
199-FSMA2 (2)
Bulletin 709 Motor Starter
120V ac
1401-N10(2)
Bulletin 700 Type R, RM Relays
AC coil
None Required
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay
12V dc
12V dc
199-FSMA9
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay
24V dc
24V dc
199-FSMA9
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay
48V dc
48V dc
199-FSMA9
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay
115-125V dc
115-125V dc
199-FSM10
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay
230-250V dc
230-250V dc
199-FSMA11
Bulletin 700 Type N, P, or PK Relay
150V max, AC or DC 700-N24(2)
Miscellaneous electromagnetic
devices limited to 35 sealed VA
150V max, AC or DC 700-N24(2)
(1) Varistor – Not recommended for use on relay outputs.
(2) RC Type – Do not use with Triac outputs.
Selecting Contact Protection
Inductive load devices such as motor starters and solenoids may
require the use of some type of surge suppression to protect the
controller output contacts. Switching inductive loads without surge
suppression can significantly reduce the lifetime of relay contacts. The
figure below shows the use of surge suppression devices.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-29
Surge Suppression for Inductive AC Load Devices
Output Device
Output Device
Output Device
Surge
Suppressor
Varistor
RC Network
Surge Suppression for Inductive DC Load Devices
-
+
Output Device
Diode (A surge suppressor can also be used.)
Contact protection methods for inductive AC and DC output devices.
These surge suppression circuits connect directly across the load
device. This reduces arcing of the output contacts. (High transient can
cause arcing that occurs when switching off an inductive device.)
Suitable surge suppression methods for inductive AC load devices
include a varistor, an RC network, or an Allen-Bradley surge
suppressor. These components must be appropriately rated to
suppress the switching transient characteristic of the particular
inductive device.
For inductive DC load devices, a diode is suitable. A 1N4004 diode is
acceptable for most applications. A surge suppressor can also be used.
See the table on page 2-28.
Locate the suppression device as close as possible to the load device.
Transistor Output Transient Pulses
This section applies to the following SLC 500 fixed I/O processors and
SLC 500 I/O modules that have transistor outputs:
Fixed I/O processors with
transistor outputs
I/O modules with transistor outputs
• 1747-L20E
• 1746-OB8
• 1746-OBP16
• 1747-L20G
• 1746-OBP8
• 1746-OV16
• 1747-L20L
• 1746-OV8
• 1746-OVP16
• 1747-L20N
• 1746-OB16
• 1746-OB32
• 1747-L30L
• 1746-OB16E
• 1746-OB32E
• 1747-L40E
• 1746-OB16EI
• 1746-OV32
• 1747-L40L
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
2-30
Selecting Your Hardware Components
For the SLC 500 products listed above, the maximum duration of the
transient pulse occurs when minimum load is connected to the
output. However, for most applications the energy of the transient
pulse is not sufficient to energize the load.
ATTENTION
!
A transient pulse occurs in transistor outputs when the
external DC supply voltage is applied to the common
output terminals (e.g., via the master control relay).
The sudden application of voltage creates this
transient pulse. (See the following graph.) This
condition is inherent in transistor outputs and is
common to solid state devices. A transient pulse can
occur regardless of the processor having power or
not.
Transient Pulse
Current
Transient (I)
(On-State Load
Current)
Duration of Transient (T)
Time
To reduce the possibility of inadvertent operation of devices
connected to transistor outputs, adhere to the following guidelines:
• Either ensure that any programmable device connected to the
transistor output is programmed to ignore all output signals until
after the transient pulse has ended,
• or add an external resistor in parallel to the load to increase the
on-state load current. The duration of the transient pulse is
reduced when the on-state load current is increased.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-31
The duration of the transient pulse is proportional to the load
impedance. This is illustrated in the following graph.
10
9
8
Duration of Transient (ms)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
EXAMPLE
100
200
400
500
600
700
300
On-State Load Current (mA)
800
900 1000
Increasing the load current by 100 mA decreases the
transient time from approximately 7 ms to less than
2.5 ms. To calculate the size of the resistor added in
parallel to increase the current, use the following
information:
24V = your applied voltage
Need 100 mA of load current to reduce the transient
to <2.5 ms. (taken from graph above).
R (Ω) = V (Volts)/I (Amps)
Resistor value (Ohms) = Applied voltage
(Volts)/Desired current (Amps) = 24/0.1 = 240 (Ω)
P (Watts) = 12 (Amps) x R (Ω)
Actual Power (Watts) = (Desired Current)2 x Resistor
Value = (0.1)2 x 240 = 2.4 (Watts)
Resistor size = 2 x Actual power (Watts) = 4.8W =
approximately 5W
Use a resistor rated for 240 Ohms at 5 Watts to
decrease the transient time from approximately 7 ms
to less than 2.5 ms.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
2-32
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Chapter
3
System Installation Recommendations
To help you install the SLC 500 programmable controller as safely and
securely as possible, follow the specific recommendations in this
chapter. For general installation guidelines, also refer to the
requirements specific to your region.
• Europe: Reference the standards found in EN 60204 and your
national regulations.
• United States: Refer to article 70E of the National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA). It describes electrical safety requirements
for employee workplaces.
This chapter covers the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
typical installation
spacing your controllers
preventing excessive heat
grounding guidelines
master control relay
power considerations
safety considerations
preventive maintenance
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
3-2
System Installation Recommendations
Typical Installation
The figure below consists of some components that make up a typical
installation. The following symbols are used:
1. NEMA-rated enclosure suitable for
your application and environment that
shields your controller from electrical
noise and airborne contaminants.
(1)
(4)
MCR
2. Disconnect device, to remove power
from the system
(2) Disconnect
Device
(6)
(3)
3. Fused isolation transformer or a
constant voltage transformer, as your
application requires
Isolation
Transformer
(5)
4. Master control relay/emergency-stop
circuit
SLC 500
Controller
5. Terminal blocks or wiring ducts
6. Suppression devices for limiting EMI
(electromagnetic interference)
generation
ATTENTION
Vertical mounting is not recommended due to
thermal considerations.
!
Spacing Your Controller
The figure on the following page depicts acceptable layouts. Follow
the recommended minimum spacing to allow for convection cooling
within the enclosure. Air temperature in the enclosure must be kept
within a range of 0°C to +60°C (32°F to +140°F).
IMPORTANT
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Be careful of metal chips when drilling mounting
holes for the controllers. Do not drill holes above a
mounted SLC 500 controller.
System Installation Recommendations
C
3-3
C
1746-C9 Cable
SLC 500
A
A
SLC 500
1746-C9
Cable
1746-C7 Cable
B
B
C
SLC 500
D
B
B
SLC 500
A
SLC 500
1746-C9
Cable
Recommended Spacing
B
A. 15.3 to 20.0 cm (6 to 8 in.) when using the 1746-C9 cable. If you
mount two 13-slot chassis above each other, the distance cannot
exceed 10.2 to 12.7 cm (4 to 5 in.).
B. Greater than 10.2 cm (4 in.)
SLC 500
C. Greater than 15.3 cm (6 in.)
C
D. 7.7 to 10.2 cm (3 to 4 in.) when using the 1746-C7 cable
Preventing Excessive Heat
For most applications, normal convection cooling will keep the
SLC 500 controller components within the specified operating range of
0°C to +60°C (+32°F to +140°F). Proper spacing of components within
the enclosure is usually sufficient for heat dissipation.
In some applications, a substantial amount of heat is produced by
other equipment inside or outside the enclosure. In this case, place
blower fans inside the enclosure to assist in air circulation and to
reduce “hot spots” near the SLC 500 controller.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
3-4
System Installation Recommendations
Additional cooling provisions might be necessary when high ambient
temperatures are encountered.
IMPORTANT
Grounding Guidelines
Do not bring in unfiltered outside air. It may
introduce harmful contaminants of dirt that could
cause improper operation or damage to components.
In extreme cases, you may need to use air
conditioning to protect against heat build-up within
the enclosure.
In solid-state control systems, grounding helps limit the effects of
electrical noise due to electromagnetic interference (EMI). The ground
path for the SLC 500 controller and its enclosure is provided by the
equipment grounding conductor.
Normal Electrical Noise Conditions
Severe Electrical Noise Conditions
5.2 mm2 (10 AWG)
to Ground Bus
Chassis
Mounting Tab
Size M4 or M5
(#10 or #12)
Internal Star
Washer
Size M5 or M6
(4.826mm or 5.48 mm)
Hardware
Ground Lug
Size M5 or M6
(#10 or #12)
Internal Star
Washer
Tapped Hole
(Minimum of Three
Threads)
Scrape paint off panel to insure
electrical connection between chassis
and grounded metal panel.
Metal Panel
(Must be connected to
earth ground.)
ATTENTION
!
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Chassis Mounting Tab
Size M5 or M6
(4.826mm or 5.48
mm) Hardware
Tapped Hole (Minimu
of Three Threads)
Scrape paint off panel to insure
electrical connection between
chassis and grounded metal panel.
Metal Panel
(Must be connected
to earth ground.)
The 1746 chassis, the enclosure, and other control
devices must be properly grounded. All applicable
codes and ordinances must be observed when
wiring the SLC 500 controller system.
System Installation Recommendations
3-5
Ground connections should run from the chassis and power supply
on each SLC 500 controller and expansion unit to the ground bus.
Exact connections will differ between applications.
Europe: Reference EN 60204 for safety information on grounding.
Also, refer to Allen-Bradley Programmable Controller Grounding and
Wiring Guidelines, Publication Number 1770-4.1 and System Design
for Control of Electrical Noise, publication number GMC-RM001.
United States: An authoritative source on grounding requirements for
most installations is the National Electrical Code. Also, refer to
Allen-Bradley Programmable Controller Grounding and Wiring
Guidelines, Publication Number 1770-4.1 and System Design for
Control of Electrical Noise, publication number GMC-RM001.
In addition to the grounding required for the SLC 500 controller and
its enclosure, you must also provide proper grounding for all
controlled devices in your application. Care must be taken to provide
each device with an acceptable grounding path.
This figure shows you how to run ground connections from the
chassis to the ground bus. The recommended grounding method is
shown below. Using a ground bus reduces the electrical resistance at
the connection.
Nearest Ground Bus
Earth Ground
8.37 mm2 (8 AWG) wire
Safety Ground
2 mm2 (14 AWG)
Functional Ground
5.26 mm2 (10 AWG)
(1)
Safety Ground
2 mm2 (14 AWG)
(1)
Safety Ground
(1)
2 mm2 (14 AWG)
(1) Keep safety ground connection to panel as short as possible.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
3-6
System Installation Recommendations
Special Grounding Considerations for DC Applications using
1746-P3
Keep wire length as short as possible.
ATTENTION
!
Any voltage applied to the 1746-P3 DC NEUT
terminal will be present at the SLC logic ground and
the processor DH-485 port. To prevent unwanted
potentials across the logic ground of the controller
and/or damage to the SLC chassis, the DC NEUTRAL
of the external DC power source must be either
isolated from the SLC chassis ground, or connected
to earth ground. See the figure below:
1746-P3
External DC Power Source
Not Used
+24V dc
DH-485
Port
SLC Logic Ground
DC Neut
DC NEUT
Chassis
Ground
Chassis
Ground
Earth Ground
SLC 500 Chassis
Door
Not Used
+24 VDC
Processor
A jumper wire is recommended
between the DC NEUT and Chassis
Ground of the external power source.
Safety Ground
Earth Ground
Modification to the SLC 500 Series A Chassis
SLC 500 chassis (1746-A4, -A7, -A10, and -A13) manufactured before
November 1992 have a resistor between the logic ground and chassis
ground. This resistor could be damaged if the wiring recommendation
described within the attention box on the previous page is not
followed. See the figure below for the location of the resistor. SLC 500
chassis (1746-A4, -A7, -A10, and -A13) with a manufacture date of
November 1992 or later do not have this resistor.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
System Installation Recommendations
Processor
3-7
SLC 500 Chassis
1746-P3
Door
Not Used
DH-485
Port
Not Used
SLC Logic
Ground
Resistor
+24V dc
DC Neut
Chassis Ground
Chassis
Ground
Safety Ground
Earth Ground
Determining the Date of the SLC 500 Series A Chassis
The date of the chassis is found within the serial number imprinted on
the chassis nameplate, located on the right side of the chassis. See the
figure below:
SLC 500
RACK
CAT
1746 - A7
SER
A
®
UL SA®
SERIAL NO.
A7 -1195A1357
MADE IN U. S. A.
Right Side
Month
Year
Master Control Relay
A hard-wired master control relay (supplied by you) provides a
convenient means for emergency controller shutdown. Since the
master control relay allows the placement of several emergency-stop
switches in different locations, its installation is important from a
safety standpoint. Overtravel limit switches or mushroom head push
buttons are wired in series so that when any of them opens, the
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
3-8
System Installation Recommendations
master control relay is de-energized. This removes power to input and
output device circuits.
ATTENTION
!
IMPORTANT
Never alter these circuits to defeat their function,
since serious injury and/or machine damage could
occur.
If you are using a DC power supply, interrupt the DC
side rather than the AC side to avoid the additional
delay of power supply turn-on and turn-off. The DC
power supply should receive its power directly from
the fused secondary of the transformer. Connect the
power to the DC input and output circuits through a
set of master control relay contacts.
Place the main power disconnect switch where operators and
maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it. If you mount
a disconnect switch inside the controller enclosure, place the switch
operating handle on the outside of the enclosure, so that you can
disconnect power without opening the enclosure.
Whenever any of the emergency-stop switches are opened, power to
input and output devices is stopped.
When you use the master control relay to remove power from the
external I/O circuits, power continues to be provided to the
controller’s power supply so that diagnostic indicators on the
processor can still be observed.
The master control relay is not a substitute for a disconnect to the
controller. It is intended for any situation where the operator must
quickly de-energize I/O devices only. When inspecting or installing
terminal connections, replacing output fuses, or working on
equipment within the enclosure, use the disconnect to shut off power
to the rest of the system.
IMPORTANT
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
The operator must not control the master control
relay with the processor. Provide the operator with
the safety of a direct connection between an
emergency-stop switch and the master control relay.
System Installation Recommendations
3-9
Emergency-Stop Switches
Adhere to the following points concerning emergency-stop switches:
• Do not program emergency-stop switches in the controller
program. Any emergency-stop switch should turn off all
machine power by turning off the master control relay.
• Observe all applicable local codes concerning the placement
and labeling of emergency-stop switches.
• Install emergency-stop switches and the master control relay in
your system. Make certain that relay contacts have a sufficient
rating for your application. Emergency-stop switches must be
easy to reach. See the schematic on page 3-10.
Power Considerations
Common Power Source
All chassis power supplies should have the same power source as the
input and output devices. This helps reduce the chance of electrical
interference due to multiple sources and grounds as well as helps
maintain system integrity if power is interrupted.
The processor detects the absence of power to any chassis in the
system. If power to any chassis is lost (or not yet applied), the CPU
FAULT LED turns on and all controller outputs in the local chassis are
de-energized. Output states in any remote chassis are determined by
configuration settings at that chassis.
This fault detection makes it necessary that you apply power to the
expansion chassis before you apply power to the chassis containing
the processor to avoid an unwanted fault. Of course, applying power
in sequence is unnecessary if all chassis have a common power
source.
Isolation Transformer
In many industrial applications, a step-down transformer is required to
reduce line voltage to 120 or 240V ac. This transformer also provides
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
3-10
System Installation Recommendations
isolation to protect equipment from high voltage transients that may
be generated on your power distribution system.
Your SLC 500 power supply can be damaged by
voltage surges when switching inductive loads such
as motors, motor starters, solenoids, and relays. To
avoid damage to your SLC 500 power supply in these
applications, use an isolation transformer to isolate
the power supply from harmful voltage surges.
ATTENTION
!
Grounded ac Power-Distribution System with Master-Control
Relay
Suppressor
Disc.
1FU
L1
Incoming
AC
L1
2FU
L2
L2
3FU
L3
To Motor
Starters
L3
Back-panel
Ground Bus
Step-down
Transformer
Grounded Conductor
FUSE
Multiple E-stop
switches
Start
EquipmentGrounding
Conductors
MCR
The I/O circuits form a net
inductive load switched
by the CRM contacts.
Therefore, a suppressor is
needed across the line at
the load side of the CRM
contacts.
Enclosure
Wall
Grounding-electrode
Conductor to
Grounding-electrode
System
1
MCR
Controller
L1 Power Supply
MCR
Suppressor
Connect when
applicable
GND
N or L2
User DC
Supply
Suppressor
Output
Actuator
CRM
+ –
Input
Sensor Input Module
Wiring Arm
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Output Module
Wiring Arm
System Installation Recommendations
3-11
Power Supply Required Input Voltage Characteristics
1. The applied input voltage must be at or below 132V ac RMS
(265V ac RMS in 240 Volt mode).
2. Minimum acceptable value of the applied input voltage must be
above 85V ac RMS (170V ac RMS in 240 Volt mode).
3. The frequency of the applied voltage must be within 47 to
63 Hz.
4. Both the positive and negative half cycles must be symmetrical
and conform to these requirements.
Loss of Power Source
The chassis power supplies are designed to withstand brief power
losses without affecting the operation of the system. The time the
system is operational during power loss is called “program scan
hold-up time after loss of power.” The duration of the power supply
hold-up time depends on the number, type, and state of the I/O
modules, but is typically between 20 ms and 3 seconds. When the
duration of power loss reaches a limit, the power supply signals the
processor that it can no longer provide adequate DC power to the
system. This is referred to as a power supply shutdown. The power
supply LED is turned off.
In multi-chassis systems, power outages of 20 to 300 ms in duration
can cause a remote power fail error to occur. You can clear this error
by cycling power to your system or by using a programming device.
Input States on Power Down
The power supply hold-up time as described above is generally
longer than the turn-on and turn-off times of the input modules.
Because of this, the input state change from On to Off that occurs
when power is removed may be recorded by the processor before the
power supply shuts down the system. Understanding this concept is
important. Write the user program to take this effect into account. For
example, hard-wire power to one spare input. In the user program,
check to be sure that one input is on; otherwise, jump to the end of
the program and avoid scanning the logic. Use of a common power
source as recommended in the previous section is assumed.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
3-12
System Installation Recommendations
Other Types of Line Conditions
Occasionally, the power source to the system can be temporarily
interrupted. It is also possible that the voltage level may drop
substantially below the normal line voltage range for a period of time.
Both of these conditions are considered to be a loss of power for the
system.
Safety Considerations
Safety considerations are an important element of proper system
installation. Actively thinking about the safety of yourself and others,
as well as the condition of your equipment, is of primary importance.
Disconnecting Main Power
Locate the main power disconnect switch where operators and
maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it. Ideally, the
disconnect switch is mounted on the outside of the enclosure, so that
it can be accessed without opening the enclosure. In addition to
disconnecting electrical power, de-energize all other sources of power
(pneumatic and hydraulic) before working on a machine or process
controlled by an SLC controller.
Safety Circuits
Circuits installed on the machine for safety reasons, like overtravel
limit switches, stop push buttons, and interlocks, should always be
hard-wired directly to the master control relay. These devices must be
wired in series so that when any one device opens, the master control
relay is de-energized thereby removing power to the machine. Never
alter these circuits to defeat their function. Serious injury or machine
damage could result.
Power Distribution
There are some points about power distribution that you should be
aware of. First, the master control relay must be able to inhibit all
machine motion by removing power to the machine I/O devices
when the relay is de-energized.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
System Installation Recommendations
3-13
Second, if you are using a DC power supply, interrupt the load side
rather than the AC line power. This avoids the additional delay of
power supply turn-on and turn-off. The DC power supply should be
powered directly from the fused secondary of the transformer. Power
to the DC input and output circuits is connected through a set of
master control relay contacts.
Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit
Any part can fail, including the switches in a master control relay
circuit. The failure of one of these switches would most likely cause
an open circuit, which would be a safe power-off failure. However, if
one of these switches shorts out, it no longer provides any safety
protection. These switches should be tested periodically to assure they
will stop machine motion when needed.
Preventive Maintenance
The printed circuit boards of the controller must be protected from
dirt, oil, moisture and other airborne contaminants. To protect these
boards, the controller must be installed in an enclosure suitable for
the environment. The interior of the enclosure should be kept clean
and the enclosure door should be kept closed whenever possible.
Regularly inspect your terminal connections for tightness. Loose
connections may cause improper functioning of the controller or
damage the components of the system.
ATTENTION
!
To ensure personal safety and to guard against
damaging equipment, inspect connections with
incoming power off.
The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) provides
recommendations for electrical equipment maintenance. Refer to
article 70B of the NFPA for general requirements regarding safety
related work practices.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
3-14
System Installation Recommendations
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Chapter
4
Mounting Your SLC 500 Control System
This chapter provides mounting dimensions for:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Mounting Modular
Hardware Style Units
4, 7, 10, and 13-slot chassis
link coupler (AIC)
Data Terminal Access Module (DTAM)
DTAM Plus Operator Interface
DTAM Micro Operator Interface
AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter
DNI DeviceNet Network Interface
ENI EtherNet Network Interface
You can mount the modular hardware style units directly to the back
panel of your enclosure using the mounting tabs and #10 or #12
screws. The torque requirement is 3.4 N-m (30 in-lbs) maximum.
4-Slot Modular Chassis
11 Dia.
(0.433)
(3)
70
(2.76)
1.0
(0.04)
5.5 Dia.
(0.217)
(2) (1)
158
(6.22)
140 171
(5.51) (6.73)
171
(6.73)
140
(5.51)
14
(0.55)
45
(1.77)
5.5 Dia
(0.217)
145
(5.71)
215
(8.46)
235
(9.25)
261
(10.28)
millimeters
(inches)
Left Side View
Front View
(1) Dimensions for 1746-P1 power supply.
(2) Dimensions for 1746-P2, -P3, -P5, -P6, and -P7 power supplies.
(3) Dimensions for 1746-P4 power supply.
1
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
4-2
Mounting Your SLC 500 Control System
7-Slot Modular Chassis
11 Dia.
(0.433)
(3)
. Dia.
(0.217)
175
(6.89)
1.0
(0.04)
(2) (1)
140
(5.51)
158
(6.22)
140
(5.51)
171
(6.73) 171
(6.73)
14
(0.55)
45
(1.77)
5.5 Dia
(0.217)
145
(5.71)
320
(12.60)
340
(13.39)
366
(14.41)
millimeters (inches)
Front View
Left Side View
10-Slot Modular Chassis
11 Dia.
(0.433)
(3)
5.5 Dia.
(0.217)
140
(5.51)
1.0
(0.04)
55
(2.17)
(2) (1)
140
(5.51)
140 171
(5.51) (6.73)
158
(6.22)
14
(0.55)
5.5 Dia
(0.217)
145
(5.71)
140
(5.51)
435
(17.13)
455
(17.91)
481
(18.94)
Front View
millimeters (inches)
(1) Dimensions for 1746-P1 power supply.
(2) Dimensions for 1746-P2, -P3, -P5, -P6, and -P7 power supplies.
(3) Dimensions for 1746-P4 power supply.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Left Side View
Mounting Your SLC 500 Control System
4-3
13-Slot Modular Chassis
11 Dia.
(0.433)
(3)
5.5 Dia.
(0.217)
105
(4.13)
55
(2.17)
140
(5.51)
(2) (1)
158
(6.22)
140
(5.51)
5.5 Dia
(0.217)
171
(6.73)
14
(0.55)
140
(5.51)
540
(21.26)
560
(22.05)
586
(23.07)
1.0
(0.04)
Front View
millimeters
(inches)
171
(6.73)
140
(5.51)
145
(5.71)
Left Side View
(1) Dimensions for 1746-P1 power supply.
(2) Dimensions for 1746-P2, -P3, -P5, -P6, and -P7 power supplies.
(3) Dimensions for 1746-P4 power supply.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
4-4
Mounting Your SLC 500 Control System
Link Coupler (AIC)
R 2.74
(0.11)
146
(5.75)
R 5.5
(0.22)
172
(6.75)
159
(6.24)
137
(5.41)
14
(0.55)
7.1
(0.28)
38
(1.50)
Front View
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
5.5 Dia.
(0.216)
millimeters
(inches)
4.3
(0.17)
Right Side View
Mounting Your SLC 500 Control System
4-5
Data Table Access Module (DTAM, DTAM Plus, and DTAM Micro)
C
A
D
B
Front View
Data Table Access Module
Right Side View
Dimensions in millimeters (inches)
A
B
C
D
DTAM
152 (6.0)
140 (5.5)
69 (2.76)
127 (5.0)
DTAM Plus
215.9 (8.5)
165.1 (6.5)
45.7 (1.8)
193 (7.6)
DTAM Micro
137.2 (5.4
175.3 (6.9)
45.7 (1.8)
99.1 (3.9)
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
4-6
Mounting Your SLC 500 Control System
AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter (1761-NET-AIC)
DeviceNet Interface (1761-NET-DNI)
Ethernet Interface (1761-NET-ENI)
52.07 mm
(2.05 in.)
118 mm
(4.64 in.)
107 mm
(4.20 in.)
6.6 mm
(0.26 in.)
Allow 15 mm (0.6 in.)
clearance for DIN rail latch
movement during installation
and removal.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
27.7 mm
(1.09 in.)
71.4 mm
(2.81 in.)
Chapter
5
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
This chapter covers the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
SLC 5/01 Processor
Hardware Features
SLC 5/01 hardware features
SLC 5/02 hardware features
SLC 5/03 hardware features
SLC 5/04 hardware features
SLC 5/05 hardware features
keyswitch for the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors
The SLC 5/01 processor provides:
•
•
•
•
•
two choices of program memory size - 1K or 4K instructions
control of up to 3840 input and output points
powerful ladder logic programming instruction set
subroutines
a DH-485 communication channel (peer-to-peer communication
response to message commands only)
• capacitor backup for the 1747-L511; battery backup for the
1747-L514
• program using the Hand-Held Terminal (HHT) or programming
software
• UL listed, CSA approved, CE compliant, C-Tick marked
The figure on page 5-2 shows the hardware components of the
SLC 5/01 processor (1747-L511 and 1747-L514).
1
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
5-2
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
SLC 5/01 CPU
Memory
Module and
Socket
PC RUN
CPU FAULT
FORCED I/O
BATTERY LOW
Battery
(provides back-up
power for the
CMOS RAM)
Left Side View
Serial Number and Catalog Number
DH-485
Channel 1
Front View
The table below provides a general explanation of the SLC 5/01
processor LEDs.
Processor
LED(1)
When It Is
Indicates that
PC RUN
(Color: red)
On (steady)
The processor is in the Run mode.
Off
The processor is in a mode other than Run.
CPU FAULT
(Color: red)
Flashing (at power up)
The processor has not been configured.
Flashing (during
operation)
The processor detects a major error either in
the processor, chassis or memory.
On (steady)
A fatal error is present (no communication).
Off
There are no errors.
Flashing
One or more input or output addresses have
been forced to an On or Off state but the
forces have not been enabled.
On (steady)
The forces have been enabled.
Off
No forces are present or enabled.
On (steady)
The battery voltage has fallen below a
threshold level or the battery and the battery
jumper are missing.
Off
The battery is functional, or the battery
jumper is present.
FORCED I/O
(Color: red)
BATTERY LOW
(Color: red)
(1) See Chapter 10 for more information on LED status.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
SLC 5/02 Processor
Hardware Features
5-3
The SLC 5/02 processor offers an enhanced instruction set, increased
diagnostic capabilities, and expanded communication capabilities
beyond the SLC 5/01 processors and fixed controllers. The SLC 5/02
provides:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
program memory size of 4K instructions
control of up to 4096 input and output points
PID - used to provide closed loop process control
indexed addressing
interrupt capability
user fault routines
ability to handle 32-bit signed math functions
built-in DH-485 communication channel (initiation of
peer-to-peer communication)
battery-backed RAM
communication LED; when on, the LED indicates that there is
communication activity on the DH-485 network
program using the Hand-Held Terminal (HHT) or programming
software
UL listed, CSA approved, CE compliant, C-Tick marked
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
5-4
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
The figure below shows some of the hardware components of the
SLC 5/02 processor (1747-L524 Series B and Series C).
1747-L524 Series B
SLC 5/02 CPU
RUN
COMM
CPU FAULT
FORCED I/O
BATTERY LOW
Left Side View
Memory Module
and Socket
Serial Number and
Catalog Number
Battery (provides
back-up power for
the CMOS RAM)
1747-L524 Series C
DH-485
Channel 1
Left Side View
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
5-5
The table below provides a general explanation of each processor
status LED (for both the SLC 5/02 Series B and C).
Processor
LED(1)
When It Is
Indicates that
RUN
(Color: red)
On (steady)
The processor is in the Run mode.
Off
The processor is in a mode other than Run.
CPU FAULT
(Color: red)
Flashing (at
power up)
The processor has not been configured.
Flashing (during
operation)
The processor detects a major error either in the
processor, expansion chassis or memory.
On (steady)
A fatal error is present (no communication).
Off
There are no errors.
Flashing
One or more input or output addresses have been
forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not
been enabled.
On (steady)
The forces have been enabled.
Off
No forces are present or enabled.
FORCED I/O
(Color: red)
BATTERY LOW On (steady)
(Color: red)
COMM
(Color: red)
The battery voltage has fallen below a threshold level
or the battery is missing or not connected.
Off
The battery is functional.
On (steady)
The SLC 5/02 is connected to an active DH485
network.
Off
The SLC 5/02 is not receiving data.
(1) See Chapter 10 for more information on LED status.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
5-6
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
SLC 5/03 Processor
Hardware Features
The SLC 5/03 processor offers the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
program memory size of 8K or 16K
control of up to 4096 input and output points
online programming (includes runtime editing)
built-in DH-485 channel
built-in RS-232 channel, supporting:
– DF1 Full-Duplex for point-to-point communication; remotely
via a modem, or direct connection to programming or
operator interface devices. (Use a 1747-CP3 cable for direct
connection.)
– DF1 Half-Duplex Master/Slave for SCADA type
(point-to-multipoint) communication
– DH-485 (Serves as a second DH-485 channel. Use a
1761-NET-AIC with a 1747-CP3, 1761-CBL-AC00, or
1761-CBL-AP00 cable to connect to the DH-485 network.)
– ASCII I/O for connection to other ASCII devices, such as bar
code readers, serial printers, and weigh scales
remote I/O passthru
DeviceNet passthru
built-in real-time clock/calendar
2 ms Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI)
0.50 ms Discrete Input Interrupt (DII)
advanced math features - trigonometric, PID, exponential,
floating-point, and the compute instruction
indirect addressing
flash PROM provides firmware upgrades without physically
changing EPROMS
optional flash EPROM memory module available
keyswitch - RUN, REMote, PROGram (clear faults)
battery-backed RAM
additional instructions such as swap and scale with parameters
(SLC 5/03 OS302 processor or higher)
multi-point list (SLC 5/03 OS302 processor or higher)
UL listed, CSA approved, CE compliant. C-Tick marked
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
5-7
The figure below shows some of the hardware components of the
SLC 5/03 processors (1747-L531 and 1747-L532).
SLC 5/03 CPU
RUN
FLT
BATT
FORCE
DH485
RS232
RUN REM PROG
Battery
(provides
back-up power
for the CMOS
RAM)
Memory
Module
Keyswitch
DH-485
Channel 1
DH-485, DF1,
or ASCII
Channel 0
Operating System Download Protection Jumper
– do not move unless updating processor
Operating System firmware.
Left Side View
Serial Number and
Catalog Number
Front View
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
5-8
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
The table below provides a general explanation of each processor
status LED on the SLC 5/03 processor.
Processor
LED(1)(2)
When It Is
Indicates that
RUN
(Color: green)
On (steady)
The processor is in the Run mode.
Flashing (during operation)
The processor is transferring a program from RAM to the memory module.
Off
The processor is in a mode other than Run.
Flashing (at power up)
The processor has not been configured.
Flashing (during operation)
The processor detects a major error either in the processor, chassis or memory.
On (steady)
A fatal error is present (no communications).
Off
There are no errors.
On (steady)
The battery voltage has fallen below a threshold level, or the battery is missing or not
connected.
Off
The battery is functional.
Flashing
One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the
forces have not been enabled.
On (steady)
The forces have been enabled.
Off
No forces are present or enabled.
On (steady)
The Communications Active Bit (S:1/7) is set in the System Status file and the processor
is actively communicating on the DH-485 network.
Flashing
The processor is trying to establish communications, but there are no other active nodes
on the DH-485 network.
Off
A fatal error is present (no communications).
On (flashing)
DF1/ASCII Mode
The SLC 5/03 is transmitting on the network.
Off
DF1/ASCII Mode
The SLC 5/03 processor is not transmitting on the network.
On (steady)
DH-485 Mode
The Communications Active Bit (S:33/4) is set in the System Status file and the processor
is actively communicating on the DH-485 network.
Flashing
DH-485 Mode
The processor is trying to establish communications, but there are no other active nodes
on the DH-485 network.
Off
DH-485 Mode
A fatal error is present (no communications).
FLT
(Color: red)
BATT
(Color: red)
FORCE
(Color: amber)
DH-485
(Color: green)
RS-232
(Color: green)
(1) If the LEDs on the SLC 5/03 turn on in a predefined sequence, the SLC 5/03 is in the process of downloading a new operating system.
(2) See Chapter 10 for more information on LED status.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
SLC 5/04 Processor
Hardware Features
5-9
The SLC 5/04 processors offer the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
program memory sizes of 16K, 32K, or 64K
high-speed performance - 0.90 ms/K typical
control of up to 4096 input and output points
online programming (includes runtime editing)
built-in DH+channel, supporting:
– high-speed communication (57.6K, 115.2K, and 230.4K baud)
– messaging capabilities with SLC 500, PLC®-2, PLC®-5, and
ControlLogix processors
built-in RS-232 channel, supporting:
– DF1 Full-Duplex for point-to-point communication; remotely
via a modem, or direct connection to programming or
operator interface devices. (Use a 1747-CP3, 1761-CBL-AC00,
or 1761-CBL-AC00 cable for direct connection.)
– DF1 Half-Duplex Master/Slave for SCADA type
(point-to-multipoint) communication
– DH-485 (Use a 1761-NET-AIC with a 1747-CP3 cable to
connect to the DH-485 network.)
– ASCII I/O for connection to other ASCII devices, such as bar
code readers, serial printers, and weigh scales
channel-to-channel (DH+ to DH-485) passthru capability to
operator interface devices
channel-to-channel (DF1 Full-Duplex to DH+) passthru
remote I/O passthru
DeviceNet passthru
built-in real-time clock/calendar
1 ms Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI)
0.50 ms Discrete Input Interrupt (DII)
advanced math features - trigonometric, PID, exponential,
floating point, and the compute instruction
indirect addressing
flash PROM provides firmware upgrades without physically
changing EPROMS
optional flash EPROM memory module available
keyswitch - RUN, REMote, PROGram (clear faults)
battery-backed RAM
additional instructions such as swap and scale with parameters
multi-point list
UL listed, CSA approved, CE compliant, C-Tick marked
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
5-10
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
This figure below shows some of the hardware components of the
SLC 5/04 processors (1747-L541, 1747-L542, or 1747-L543).
SLC 5/04 CPU
RUN
FLT
BATT
FORCE
DH+
RS232
RUN REM PROG
Battery
(provides
back-up
power for the
CMOS RAM)
Memory
Module
DH+
Channel 1
Keyswitch
DH-485, DF1,
or ASCII
Channel 0
Operating System Download Protection Jumper
– do not move unless updating processor
Operating System firmware.
Serial Number and
Catalog Number
Left Side View
Front View
The table below provides a general explanation of each processor
status LED on the SLC 5/04 processors.
Processor
LED(1)(2)
When It Is
Indicates that
RUN
(Color: green)
On (steady)
The processor is in the Run mode.
Flashing (during
operation)
The processor is transferring a program from
RAM to the memory module.
Off
The processor is in a mode other than Run.
Flashing (at power up)
The processor has not been configured.
Flashing (during
operation)
The processor detects a major error either in
the processor, chassis, or memory.
On (steady)
A fatal error is present (no communications).
Off
There are no errors.
On (steady)
The battery voltage has fallen below a
threshold level, or the battery is missing or
not connected.
Off
The battery is functional.
FLT
(Color: red)
BATT
(Color: red)
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
5-11
Processor
LED(1)(2)
When It Is
Indicates that
FORCE
(Color: amber)
Flashing
One or more input or output addresses have
been forced to an On or Off state but the
forces have not been enabled.
On (steady)
The forces have been enabled.
Off
No forces are present or enabled.
DH+
On (steady)
(Color: green or
red)
RS-232
(Color: green)
The Communications Active Bit (S:1/7) is set
in the System Status file and the processor is
actively communicating on the DH+ network.
Flashing Green
The processor is trying to establish
communications, but there are no other active
nodes on the DH+ network.
Flashing Red
There are duplicate nodes on the link with the
same node address.
On (steady)
DF1/ASCII Mode
The SLC 5/04 processor is transmitting on the
network.
Off
DF1/ASCII Mode
The SLC 5/04 processor is not transmitting on
the network.
On (steady)
DH-485 Mode
The Communications Active Bit (S:33/4) is set
in the System Status file and the processor is
actively communicating on the DH-485
network.
Flashing
DH-485 Mode
The processor is trying to establish
communications, but there are no other active
nodes on the DH-485 network.
Off
DH-485 Mode
A fatal error is present (no communications).
(1) If the LEDs on the SLC 5/04 turn on in a predefined sequence, the SLC 5/04 is in the process of downloading a
new operating system.
(2) See Chapter 10 for more information on LED status.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
5-12
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
SLC 5/05 Processor
Hardware Features
The SLC 5/05 processors offer the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
program memory sizes of 16K, 32K, or 64K
high-speed performance - 0.90 ms/K typical
control of up to 4096 input and output points
online programming (includes runtime editing)
built-in 10Base-T Ethernet channel, supporting:
– high-speed computer communication using TCP/IP
– messaging capabilities with SLC 5/05, PLC-5, and
ControlLogix processors on Ethernet
– SNMP for standard Ethernet network management
– BOOTP for optional dynamic IP address assignment
built-in RS-232 channel, supporting:
– DF1 Full-Duplex for point-to-point communication; remotely
via a modem, or direct connection to programming or
operator interface devices. (Use a 1747-CP3, 1761-CBL-AC00,
or 1761-CBL-AP00 cable for direct connection.)
– DF1 Half-Duplex Master/Slave for SCADA type
(point-to-multipoint) communication
– DH-485 (Use a 1761-NET-AIC with a 1747-CP3 cable to
connect to the DH-485 network.)
– ASCII I/O for connection to other ASCII devices, such as bar
code readers, serial printers, and weigh scales
remote I/O passthru
built-in real-time clock/calendar
1 ms Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI)
0.50 ms Discrete Input Interrupt (DII)
advanced math features - trigonometric, PID, exponential,
floating point, and the compute instruction
indirect addressing
logical ASCII addressing in PLC-5 type messages
flash PROM provides firmware upgrades without physically
changing EPROMS through the Ethernet port
optional flash EPROM memory module available
keyswitch - RUN, REMote, PROGram (clear faults)
battery-backed RAM
additional instructions such as swap and scale with parameters
multi-point list
UL listed, CSA approved, CE compliant, C-Tick marked
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
5-13
The figure below shows some of the hardware components of the
SLC 5/05 processors (1747-L551, 1747-L552, and 1747-L553).
SLC 5/05 CPU
RUN
FLT
BATT
FORCE
ENET
RS232
RUN REM PROG
Battery
(provides
back-up
power for the
CMOS RAM)
_______ . _______ . _______ . _______
Memory
Module
Ethernet
Hardware
Address
xx:xx:xx
Operating System Download Protection Jumper
– do not move unless updating processor
Operating System firmware.
Keyswitch
Channel 1
Ethernet
(10Base-T)
Channel 0
RS 232
(DH-485,
DF1, or
ASCII)
Write-on area
for IP Address
Serial Number and
Catalog Number
Left Side View
Front View
The table below provides a general explanation of the processor
status LEDs.
Processor
LED
When It Is
Indicates that
RUN
(Color: green)
On (steady)
The processor is in the Run mode.
Flashing (during
operation)
The processor is transferring a program from
RAM to the memory module.
Off
The processor is in a mode other than Run.
Flashing (at power up)
The processor has not been configured.
Flashing (during
operation)
The processor detects a major error either in the
processor, chassis, or memory.
On (steady)
A fatal error is present (no communications).
Off
There are no errors.
On (steady)
The battery voltage has fallen below a
threshold level, or the battery is missing or not
connected.
Off
The battery is functional.
FLT
(Color: red)
BATT
(Color: red)
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
5-14
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
Processor
LED
When It Is
Indicates that
FORCE
(Color: amber)
Flashing
One or more input or output addresses have
been forced to an On or Off state but the forces
have not been enabled.
On (steady)
The forces have been enabled.
Off
No forces are present or enabled.
Solid Green
The Ethernet port is functioning properly and is
connected to an active Ethernet network.
Flashing Green
The Ethernet port is functioning properly,
connected to an active Ethernet network, and is
transmitting packets.
Flashing Red
A hardware or software fault has occurred and
is being reported via a code. Contact
Allen-Bradley Global Technical Services for
assistance.
Off
No Ethernet connection or processor halted.
On (steady)
DF1/ASCII Mode
The SLC 5/05 processor is transmitting on the
network.
Off
DF1/ASCII Mode
The SLC 5/05 processor is not transmitting on
the network.
On (steady)
DH-485 Mode
The Channel 0 Communications Active Bit
(S:33/4) is set in the System Status file and the
processor is actively communicating on the
network.
Flashing
DH-485 Mode
The processor is trying to establish
communications, but there are no other active
nodes on the DH-485 network.
Off
DH-485 Mode
A fatal error is present (no communications).
ENET
Channel 1
(Color:
green or red)
RS-232
Channel 0
(Color: green)
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
Keyswitch for the
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC
5/05 Processors
5-15
The SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors include a 3-position
keyswitch on the front panel that lets you select one of three modes
of operation: RUN, PROGram, and REMote. You can remove the key
in each of the three positions.
ATTENTION
!
IMPORTANT
Depending on the size of your user program, the
processor can take up to 2.5 seconds to change
modes when you change the position of the
keyswitch from RUN to PROG or to REM. Do not use
the keyswitch in place of a hardwired master control
relay or an emergency-stop switch.
The SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 processors do not have a
keyswitch. Therefore, all modes must be changed via
the communication channels.
RUN Position
This position places the processor in the Run mode. The processor
scans/executes the ladder program, monitors input devices, energizes
output devices, and acts on enabled I/O forces. You can only change
the processor mode by changing the keyswitch position. You cannot
perform online program editing.
To change the processor mode to Run, toggle the keyswitch from
PROG or REM to RUN. When the keyswitch is left in the RUN
position, you cannot use a programmer/operator interface device to
change the processor mode.
PROG Position
This position places the processor in the Program mode. The
processor does not scan/execute the ladder program, and the
controller outputs are de-energized. You can perform online program
editing. You can only change the processor mode by changing the
keyswitch position.
To change the processor mode to Program, toggle the keyswitch from
REM or RUN to PROG. When the keyswitch is left in the PROG
position, you cannot use a programmer/operator interface device to
change the processor mode.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
5-16
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
REM Position
This position places the processor in the Remote mode: either the
REMote Run, REMote Program, or REMote Test mode. You can change
the processor mode by changing the keyswitch position or by
changing the mode from a programmer/operator interface device. You
can perform online program editing in this position.
To change the processor mode to REM, toggle the keyswitch from
RUN or PROG to REM. When the keyswitch is in the REM position, you
can use a programmer/operator interface device to change the
processor mode.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Chapter
6
Installing Your Hardware Components
This chapter shows you how to install the following hardware
components:
•
•
•
•
•
Compliance to European
Union Directives
your processor
modules
your memory module
your power supply
your chassis interconnect cable
This product is approved for installation within the European Union
and EEA regions. It has been designed and tested to meet the
following directives.
EMC Directive
The analog modules are tested to meet Council Directive 89/336/EEC
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and the following standards, in
whole or in part, documented in a technical construction file:
• EN 50081-2
EMC – Generic Emission Standard, Part 2 - Industrial
Environment
• EN 50082-2
EMC – Generic Immunity Standard, Part 2 - Industrial
Environment
This product is intended for use in an industrial environment.
1
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
6-2
Installing Your Hardware Components
Low Voltage Directive
This product is tested to meet Council Directive 73/23/EEC Low
Voltage, by applying the safety requirements of EN 61131-2
Programmable Controllers, Part 2 – Equipment Requirements and
Tests.
For specific information required by EN61131-2, see the appropriate
sections in this publication, as well as the following Allen-Bradley
publications:
• Industrial Automation, Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for
Noise Immunity, publication 1770-4.1
• Automation Systems Catalog, publication B113
Installing Your Processor
The processor always occupies the first slot of the first chassis. You
can only install one processor per system.
ATTENTION
!
IMPORTANT
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Never install, remove, or wire any module while
power is applied. Also, do not expose processor
modules to surfaces or other areas that may typically
hold an electrostatic charge.
If your processor has a battery — the battery is an
option for the SLC 5/01 (1747-L511) processor —
make sure it is connected before installing your
processor into the chassis. This provides memory
backup for your processor should the controller
power supply fail.
Installing Your Hardware Components
Installing Modules
6-3
Follow the steps below to install your modules.
1. Align the circuit board of the module with the card guide in the
chassis.
Retainer Clip
Side View
Retainer Clip
2. Gently slide the module in until both top and bottom retainer
clips are secured.
3. Install a wire tie to secure your wiring and keep it neat. (If you
feed the tie into one hole, it will be routed back out through the
other.)
4. Cover any unused slots with card slot fillers (Catalog Number
1746-N2) to keep the chassis free from debris and dust.
5. To remove the module, press the retaining clips at the top and
bottom of the module and slide the module out.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
6-4
Installing Your Hardware Components
Installing Your Memory
Module
Always turn off power to the controller before removing the processor
or inserting or removing the memory module. This guards against
possible damage to the module and also undesired processor faults.
Memory modules are mounted in carriers or have connectors that are
“keyed” to guard against improper installation.
ATTENTION
!
To avoid potential damage to the memory modules,
handle them by the ends of the carrier or edges of
the plastic housing. Skin oil and dirt can corrode
metallic surfaces, inhibiting electrical contact. Also,
do not expose memory modules to surfaces or areas
that may typically hold an electrostatic charge.
Electrostatic charges can alter or destroy memory.
1. If the processor module is installed in the chassis, remove the
module by pressing the retainer clips at both the top and bottom
of the module and sliding it out.
2. Locate the socket (or connector if you have an SLC 5/03,
SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05) on the processor board. Then place the
memory module into the socket or onto the connector and press
firmly in place.
Side View of SLC Processor
1747-L511, -L514, and -L524 Series B
Side View of SLC Processor
1747-L524 Series C
Side View of SLC Processor
1747-L531, -L532, -L541, -L542, -L543,
-L551, -L552, and -L553
Memory
Module
Socket
Jumper J1
(Note: Jumper J1
not on 1747-L511.)
Memory
Module
Socket
Jumper J1
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Memory
Module
Connector
Installing Your Hardware Components
6-5
3. Place jumper J1 as shown below.
Processor Type
1747-M1, -M2, -M3
1747-M4
Invalid Settings
No Jumper J1
No Jumper J1
No Jumper J1
1747-L514, -L524
Series B and Series C
1747-L511, -L531, -L532,
-L541, -L542, -L543,
-L551, -L552, and -L553
4. Install the processor module into the chassis.
5. Restore power to the controller.
Removing the Memory Module
To remove a memory module, use the following procedure:
1. Remove power and pull out the processor.
2. Grasp the carrier tabs (or connector for the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04,
and SLC 5/05) with your thumb and index fingers, then gently
but firmly lift upwards on either end of the memory module
carrier.
3. When the end is partially raised, begin lifting the other end in
the same manner. Repeat this until the memory module has
been completely removed from the socket.
Installing Your Power
Supply
If you have multiple chassis configurations, install the chassis
interconnect cable before installing the power supply.
(See page 6-7.) Also, the power supply terminals accept two 2mm2
(#14 AWG) wires and are marked as shown in the figure on page 6-7.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
6-6
Installing Your Hardware Components
To install the power supply, do the following:
1. Align the circuit board with the card guide on the left side of the
chassis. Slide the power supply in until it is flush with the
chassis.
1.2 Nm (11 in-lbs.)
max. torque
2. Fasten the power supply to the chassis with the two Phillips
head screws.
3. Place the jumper to match the input voltage. (This does not
apply to 1746-P3, -P5, -P6, or -P7, which do not have a jumper.)
ATTENTION
!
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Make jumper selection before applying power.
Hazardous voltage is present on exposed pins
when power is applied.
Installing Your Hardware Components
POWER
6-7
POWER
Fuse
Fuse
Jumper
Selection
User
100/120 Volts
PWR OUT COM
Not Used
Not Used
120/240V ac
+24V dc
V ac NEUT
V dc NEUT
Chassis Ground
Chassis Ground
PWR OUT +24V dc
200/240 Volts
1746-P1 and P2
1746-P3
1746-P5
Jumper
Selection
POWER
User
PWR OUT +24V dc
PWR OUT COM
85 to 132V ac
170 to 250V ac
POWER
User
Power
PWR OUT +24V dc
PWR OUT COM
+125V dc
85 to 132V ac
V dc NEUT
Jumper
Chassis Ground
170 to 250V ac
1746-P6
L1: 85 to 132
/170 to 250V ac
1746-P4
L2: NEUT
User
Power
1746-P5, -P6, and -P7
PWR OUT +24V dc
PWR OUT COM
+48V dc
V dc NEUT
Chassis Ground
Chassis Ground
User
Power
1746-P7
Not Used
Not Used
+12/24V dc
V dc NEUT
Chassis Ground
IMPORTANT
Terminal screws on the 1746-P1, -P2, -P3, -P5, -P6,
and -P7 should be tightened with a maximum torque
of 1 Nm (8.8 in-lbs.).
Terminal screws on the 1746-P4 should be tightened
with a max torque of 0.8 Nm (7 in-lbs.).
4. Remove the warning label from the top of the power supply.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
6-8
Installing Your Hardware Components
5. Connect line power to the power supply.
ATTENTION
If you have a 1746-P3, see page 3-6 for special
grounding considerations.
!
On the 1746-P1, -P2, -P4, -P5, and -P6 power supplies, use the PWR
OUT + 24 VDC and PWR OUT COM terminals to power sensors. The
terminals provide an isolated, nonfused, 200 mA, (1000mA for 1747-P4
only), 24V dc power supply.
Installing Your Chassis
Interconnect Cable
Three cables are available to link modular hardware chassis. Catalog
Number 1746-C7 cable is 152.4 mm (6 in.) in length and is used when
connecting chassis side-by-side. Catalog Number 1746-C9 is
914.4 mm (36 in.) in length and 1746-C16 is 1.27M (50 in.) in length
and are used to link one chassis below the other.
ATTENTION
!
Do not use any cables other than those provided.
Longer cables could affect the integrity of data
communications between the chassis, possibly
causing unsafe operation. Also, make sure the cable
is properly secured to protect against the effects of
shock and vibration.
In multiple chassis configurations, install the chassis interconnect
cable before installing the power supply.
The cables are “keyed” for proper installation. The end of the cable
that plugs into the right socket in the chassis has the “key” on the top
of the connector. The opposite end of the cable has the “key” on the
inside of the connector for insertion into the expansion chassis.
To remove the cable, move the tabs on the socket outward and the
connector pops out.
ATTENTION
!
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
The expansion cable must always exit the right end
of the chassis with the processor and connect to the
left end of the next I/O chassis. Refer to the figures
on page 6-9.
Installing Your Hardware Components
C
P
U
P
S
Chassis 1
6-9
C
P
U
P
S
P
S
P
S
Chassis 2
Correct Installation
P
S
C
P
U
P
S
Incorrect Installation
Incorrect Installation
P
S
C
P
U
P
S
Incorrect Installation
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
6-10
Installing Your Hardware Components
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Chapter
7
Wiring Your I/O Modules
This chapter describes how to wire your I/O modules. It covers the
following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Defining Sinking and
Sourcing
defining sinking and sourcing
preparing your wiring layout
features of an I/O module
recommendations for wiring I/O devices
wiring your I/O modules
octal label kit installation
using removable terminal blocks
Sinking and sourcing are terms used to describe a current signal flow
relationship between field input and output devices in a control
system and their power supply.
• Field devices connected to the positive side (+V) of the field
power supply are sourcing field devices.
• Field devices connected to the negative side (DC Common) of
the field power supply are called sinking field devices.
To maintain electrical compatibility between field devices and the
programmable controller system, this definition is extended to the
input/output circuits on the discrete I/O modules.
• Sourcing I/O circuits supply (source) current to sinking field
devices.
• Sinking I/O circuits receive (sink) current from sourcing field
devices.
Europe: DC sinking input and sourcing output module circuits are the
commonly used options.
1
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
7-2
Wiring Your I/O Modules
Contact Output Circuits — AC or DC
Relays can be used for either AC or DC output circuits and
accommodate either sinking or sourcing field devices. These
capabilities are a result of the output switch being a mechanical
contact closure, not sensitive to current flow direction and capable of
accommodating a broad range of voltages.
This high degree of application flexibility makes contact output
modules very popular and useful in control environments with a
broad mix of electrical I/O circuit requirements.
Solid-State DC I/O Circuits
The design of DC field devices typically requires that they be used in
a specific sinking or sourcing circuit depending on the internal
circuitry of the device. DC input and output field circuits are
commonly used with field devices that have some form of internal
solid state circuitry that need a DC signal voltage to function.
Sourcing Device with Sinking Input Module Circuit
The field device is on the positive side of the power supply between
the supply and the input terminal. When the field device is activated,
it sources current to the input circuit.
Field Device
I
Input
DC
Input
Circuit
+
DC Power
Supply
_
DC Com
Sinking Device with Sourcing Input Module Circuit
The field device is on the negative side of the power supply between
the supply and the input terminal. When the field device is activated,
it sinks current from the input circuit.
I
Field Device
Input
DC
Input
Circuit
_
DC Power
Supply
+
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
VDC
Wiring Your I/O Modules
7-3
Sinking Device with Sourcing Output Module Circuit
The field device is on the negative side of the power supply between
the supply and the output terminal. When the output is activated, it
sources current to the field device.
VDC
+
I
Field Device
DC Power Supply
Out
DC
Output
Circuit
_
DC Com
Sourcing Device with Sinking Output Module Circuit
The field device is on the positive side of the power supply between
the supply and the output terminal. When the output is activated, it
sinks current from the field device.
+
DC Power Supply
Field Device
VDC
I
Out
DC
Output
Circuit
_
DC Com
Preparing Your Wiring
Layout
Careful wire routing within the enclosure helps to cut down electrical
noise between I/O lines. Follow these rules for routing your wires:
• Route incoming power to the controller by a separate path from
wiring to I/O devices. Where paths must cross, their intersection
should be perpendicular.
IMPORTANT
Do not run signal or communications wiring
and power wiring in the same conduit.
• If wiring ducts are used, allow for at least two inches between
I/O wiring ducts and the controller. If the terminal strips are
used for I/O wiring, allow for at least two inches between the
terminal strips and the controller.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
7-4
Wiring Your I/O Modules
• Limit the cable length for the TTL input module to 15.24 m
(50 ft.) per point and 3.05 m (10 ft.) per point for the TTL output
module. Use low power DC I/O wiring even though it is less
tolerant to electrical noise.
ATTENTION
!
Handle the TTL module by its ends, not
metallic surfaces. Electrostatic discharges can
damage the module. Do not expose the TTL
module to electrostatic charges.
• Segregate I/O wiring by signal type. Bundle wiring with similar
electrical characteristics together.
Wires with different signal characteristics should be routed into the
enclosure by separate paths. Refer to Allen-Bradley Programmable
Controller Grounding and Wiring Guidelines, Publication Number
1770-4.1.
ATTENTION
!
Recommendations for
Wiring I/O Devices
If the controller is being installed within a potentially
hazardous environment (that is, Class I, Division 2),
all wiring must comply with the requirements stated
in the National Electrical Code 501-4 (b).
The following are general recommendations for wiring I/O devices.
ATTENTION
!
Before you install and wire I/O devices, disconnect
power from the controller and any other source to
the I/O devices.
• Use acceptable wire gauge — The I/O wiring terminals are
designed to accept two wires per terminal (maximum) of the
following size wire:
– Europe: 2mm2 cross section or smaller
– United States: 14 AWG or smaller stranded wires
• See diagram on page 7-6 for maximum torque values for wiring
terminal screws and terminal block screws.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Wiring Your I/O Modules
7-5
• Label wires - Label wiring to I/O devices, power sources, and
ground. Use tape, shrink-tubing, or other dependable means for
labeling purposes. In addition to labeling, use colored insulation
to identify wiring based on signal characteristics. For example,
you may use blue for DC I/O wiring and red for AC I/O wiring.
• Secure wires - Route the wires down and away from the
module, securing them with the cable tie.
• Bundle wires - Bundle wiring for each similar I/O device
together. If you use ducts, allow at least 5 cm (2 in.) between the
ducts and the controller so there is sufficient room to wire the
devices.
• Identify terminals - Terminal cover plates have a write-on area
for each terminal. Use this area to identify your I/O devices.
Label the removable terminal block if you have not already.
ATTENTION
!
Calculate the maximum possible current in each
power and common wire. Observe all local electrical
codes dictating the maximum current allowable for
each wire size. Current above the maximum ratings
may cause wiring to overheat, which can cause
damage.
Capacitors on input modules have a stored charge
that can cause a non-lethal shock. Avoid mounting
the controller in a position where installation or
service personnel would be in danger from startle
reaction.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
7-6
Wiring Your I/O Modules
Features of an I/O Module
Below is an example of a combination I/O module.
OUTPUT
Color Band
INPUT
0
4
0
4
1
5
1
5
2
2
3
3
I/O Status
Indicators
Terminal Block Screw
maximum torque: 0.6 Nm (5.3 in-lbs)
Input and Output Terminals
Connected to Terminal Block
Terminal Block (may be color-coded
and removable on some modules)
Hinged Wiring Terminal
Door with Label
Terminal Wiring
• 2 wires per terminal maximum
• #14 AWG (2mm2) maximum
• maximum torque: 0.9 Nm (8 in-lbs)
Terminal Block Screw
maximum torque: 0.6 Nm (5.3 in-lbs)
Tie Wire
Wires Leading to Input and Output Devices
Wiring Your I/O Module
Terminals on the modules have self-lifting pressure plates that accept
two 2 mm2 (14 AWG) wires. Series B 12-point and 16-point and
analog modules are equipped with removable terminal blocks for
ease of wiring. The plug for the removable terminals is also color
coded: red (AC), blue (DC), orange (relay), or green (specialty).
LED indicators on the front of each module display the status of each
I/O point. The LED indicators illuminate when the proper signal to an
input terminal is applied or when the processor commands an output
to be energized.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Wiring Your I/O Modules
7-7
To locate the I/O module wiring diagrams, contact your Rockwell
Automation sales office for the latest product data entitled Discrete
Input and Output Modules, Publication Number 1746-2.35. Or, locate
the installation instruction sheet that was sent with your I/O module.
It also includes I/O wiring diagrams.
1. Install a tie wire to secure your wiring and keep it neat. (If you
feed the tie into one hole, it is routed back out through the
other.)
2. Cover any unused slots with card slot fillers (Catalog Number
1746-N2) to keep the chassis free from debris and dust.
Octal Label Kit Installation
The octal label kit consists of an octal filter label and a door label. Use
these octal labels to replace the decimal labels that are attached to the
I/O modules. An octal label kit is included with the I/O modules listed
in the table on the following page. The kits can also be obtained
through your Allen-Bradley distributor. (The octal label kit is
applicable when using 1746 I/O with Allen-Bradley PLC-5 processors
via a 1747-ASB Remote I/O Adapter.)
Applying the Octal Filter Label
1. Remove the octal filter label from its paper carrier.
2. Align the octal filter label numbers horizontally to the module
color bar and over the decimal filter numbers, as shown in the
illustration below.
3. Apply the octal label to the filter.
4. Press firmly to ensure proper adhesion of the label.
Applying the Octal Door Label
1. Remove the octal door label from its paper carrier.
2. Align it over the decimal door label on the inside of the door.
3. Press firmly to ensure proper adhesion of the label.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
7-8
Wiring Your I/O Modules
Decimal Filter Label
Module Color Bar
Octal Filter Label
Octal Door Label
Decimal Door Label
Octal Kit and I/O Module Information
I/O Module
Octal Kit
Catalog Number(1) Catalog Number
I/O Module
Octal Kit
Catalog Number(1) Catalog Number
1746-IA16
1746-RL40
1746-OV16
1746-RL53
1746-IB16
1746-RL41
1746-OW16
1746-RL54
1746-IG16
1746-RL42
1746-OBP16
1746-RL55
1746-IM16
1746-RL43
1746-OVP16
1746-RL56
1746-IN16
1746-RL44
1746-OAP12
1746-RL57
1746-IV16
1746-RL45
1746-IC16
1746-RL58
1746-ITB16
1746-RL46
1746-IH16
1746-RL59
1746-ITV16
1746-RL47
1746-IB32
1746-RL60
1746-OA16
1746-RL50
1746-IV32
1746-RL61
1746-OB16
1746-RL51
1746-OB32 and
-OB32E
1746-RL70
1746-OG16
1746-RL52
1746-OV32
1746-RL71
1746-OB16E
1746-RL72
(1) Kit available with series C I/O modules.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Wiring Your I/O Modules
Using the Removable
Terminal Block (RTB)
7-9
The Removable Terminal Block (RTB) is provided on all 12-point and
16-point discrete I/O modules and analog modules. They allow for
faster and more convenient wiring of the I/O modules. The modules
and the RTB are color-coded as follows:
Color
Type of I/O Removable Terminal Block
Red
AC inputs/outputs
Blue
DC inputs/outputs
Orange
relay outputs
Green
specialty modules
Replacement terminal blocks are available if they are lost or damaged.
See the replacement part list in Chapter 11.
Removing the RTB
Below are guidelines for removing the I/O Removable Terminal
Block.
ATTENTION
Never install or remove I/O modules or terminal
blocks while the SLC chassis is powered.
!
1. If the I/O module is already installed in the chassis, remove
power to the SLC chassis.
2. Unscrew the upper right and lower left terminal block release
screws.
3. Grasp the RTB with your thumb and forefinger and pull straight
out.
4. Label the RTB with appropriate slot, chassis, and module
identification.
Terminal Block
Release Screw
Terminal Block
Release Screw
Dot indicates Terminal Number 0
(or top of I/O wiring).
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
7-10
Wiring Your I/O Modules
Installing the RTB
Below are guidelines for installing the RTB.
1. Be sure the color of the RTB matches the color band on the
module.
ATTENTION
!
Inserting a wired RTB on an incorrect module
can damage the module circuitry when power
is applied.
2. Write the appropriate slot, chassis, and module type on the RTB
label.
ATTENTION
!
Disconnect power before attempting to install
or remove I/O modules or their terminal
blocks.
3. Disconnect power.
4. Align the terminal block release screws with the mating
connector in the module.
5. Press the RTB firmly onto the connector contacts.
6. Tighten the terminal block release screws. To avoid cracking the
terminal block, alternate the tightening of the screws.
Terminal Block Release Screws
Maximum Torque:
0.9 Nm (8 in-lbs)
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Chapter
8
Starting Up Your Control System
This chapter describes how to start up your control system. To
accomplish this, you must go through eight procedures.
Procedures for Starting the
Control System
Start-up involves the following procedures to be carried out in
sequence:
1. Inspect your installation.
2. Disconnect motion-causing devices.
3. Initialize and test your processor.
4. Test your inputs.
5. Test your outputs.
6. Enter and test your program.
7. Observe control motion.
8. Conduct a dry run of your application.
These procedures isolate problems such as wiring mistakes,
equipment malfunction, and programming errors in a systematic,
controlled manner.
Go through these procedures very carefully to avoid possible personal
injury and equipment damage.
IMPORTANT
1
Do not attempt system start-up until you are
thoroughly familiar with the controller components
and programming/editing techniques. You must also
be thoroughly familiar with the particular
application.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
8-2
Starting Up Your Control System
For general recommendation concerning installation safety
requirements and safety requirements and safety related work
practices, refer to the requirements specific to your region.
• Europe: Reference the standards found in EN 60204 and your
national regulations.
• United States: refer to NFPA 70E, Electrical Safety Requirements
for Employee Workplaces.
1. Inspect Your Installation
You can often prevent serious problems in later test procedures by
first making a thorough physical inspection. We recommend that you
do the following:
1. Make sure that the controller and all other devices in the system
are securely mounted.
2. Check all wiring including:
• connections from the main disconnect to the controller input
• the master control relay/emergency-stop circuit
• input device circuits
• output device circuits
Make certain that all wiring connections are correct and that
there are no missing wires. Check the tightness of all terminals
to make certain wires are secure.
3. Measure the incoming line voltage. Be certain that it
corresponds to controller requirements and that it falls within
the specified voltage range. See specifications for input voltage
ranges on page 2-14.
2. Disconnect
Motion-Causing Device
In the following test procedures, the controller is energized. As a
safety precaution, you must make certain that machine motion does
not occur. The preferred way is to disconnect the motor wires at the
motor starter or the motor itself. In this way, you can test the
operation of the starter coil, verifying that your output circuit is wired
correctly and functioning. Similarly, the preferred way to disconnect a
solenoid is to disengage the valve, leaving the coil connected.
In some instances, you may not be able to disconnect a device the
preferred way. In this case, it is necessary to open the output circuit at
some convenient point.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Starting Up Your Control System
8-3
For circuit testing purposes, it is best to open the circuit at a point as
close as possible to the motion-causing device. For example, your
output might be a relay coil that in turn energizes a motor starter; if it
is impractical to disconnect the motor wires, the next best thing to do
is to open the circuit at a point between the motor starter and the
relay contact.
ATTENTION
!
3. Initialize and Test Your
Processor
Machine motion during system checkout can be
hazardous to personnel. During the checkout
procedures 3, 4, 5, and 6, you must disconnect all
devices that, when energized, might cause machine
motion.
When you are certain that machine motion cannot occur with the
controller energized, you may begin by initializing the processor using
the following steps.
1. Energize the chassis power supply. If power is supplied to the
controller and the installation is correct, the initial factory
conditions for all processors will be:
Processor Name
“DEFAULT”
Mode
Program Mode or (S:1/0 to S:1/4 = 0 0001) or
Fault Mode
(S:1/0 to S:1/4 = 0.0001 and S:1/13 = 1)
Watchdog Values
100 ms
S:3H = 0000 1010
I/O Slot Enables
ALL ENABLED
S:11/1 through S:12/14 set to 1
Node Address
(except SLC 5/04 and 5/05)
1
Channel 1 = DH485
S:15L = 0000 0001
Baud Rate
(except SLC 5/04 and 5/05)
19.2K baud
Channel 1 = DH485
S:15H = 0000 0100
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and
SLC 5/05 only
Channel 0
configuration
DF1 Full Duplex
No Handshaking
19.2K Baud
CRC Error Check
Duplicate Detect On
No Parity
SLC 5/04 only
Channel 1
configuration
DH+
57.6K Baud
Default Node Address = 1
SLC 5/05 only
Channel 1
configuration
Ethernet(1)
10 Mbps
(1) Configuring with BOOTP enabled so that a BOOTP server on the network can automatically provide the SLC 5/05
with the configuration necessary to start communicating over Ethernet. See Appendix E for more information.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
8-4
Starting Up Your Control System
ATTENTION
!
These steps are covered more extensively in
your programming software and Hand-Held
Terminal user manuals. Reference these
manuals if you have a problem completing
one of the steps.
2. Power up the programming device.
3. Configure the controller.
4. Name the program. (Becomes the processor name when
downloaded.)
5. Program a sample test rung not affecting machine operation.
6. Save the program and controller configuration.
7. Transfer the controller configuration and sample test program to
the processor. After the new program is transferred to the
processor, the CPU FAULT LED should clear. The CPU FAULT (or
“FLT” on the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05) LED stops if it
was flashing.
8. Enter the Run mode.
The processor RUN status LED should turn on, indicating that
the controller is in the Run mode with no CPU faults. If any
other CPU status exists, refer to Chapter 9 for recommended
action.
9. Monitor and exercise simple test rung.
If a simple test rung operates successfully without CPU faults,
you may assume basic processor functions are properly
functioning. If any other processor status exists, refer to
Chapter 10 for recommended action.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Starting Up Your Control System
4. Test Your Inputs
8-5
After successful processor initialization and test, you may begin testing
inputs following these steps:
1. Assuming you are still online with the programming device, put
the controller into the Continuous Scan Test mode. This allows
the processor to scan the I/O and program, but not turn on any
physical outputs.
2. Monitor the data in data File 1, the input data file. All configured
Inputs should be displayed.
3. Make sure the first input slot, whatever slot number that may be,
is shown on the monitor.
4. Select the first input device connected to the first input terminal
on the input module in the I/O chassis.
5. Manually close and open the addressed input device.
ATTENTION
!
Never reach into a machine to actuate a
device, unexpected machine operation could
occur.
6. Observe the associated bit status using the programming device
monitor function. Also, observe input status LED.
a. When the input device is closed and the signal power is at the
input terminal, the associated status bit is set to a one, and the
input status LED should turn on.
b. When the input device is opened and signal power does not
exist at the input terminal, the associated status bit is set to a
0, and the input status LED should go off.
7. If associated bit status and input status LED match input device
status, select the next input device and repeat steps 5 and 6 until
all inputs in the SLC 500 chassis have been tested.
If associated bit status and input status LED does not match the input
device status, follow the recommended troubleshooting steps listed
below.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
8-6
Starting Up Your Control System
Input Troubleshooting Steps
1. Make sure the processor is in the Continuous Scan Test mode.
2. If associated bit status and LED status do not match the input
device status, check status file S:11 and S:12 I/O slot enables.
Bits S:11/0 through S:11/15 and S:12/0 through S:12/14 should
all be 1, enabling all I/O slots for the modular system.
3. Verify proper control power to the input device.
4. Remove the input device power and make sure circuit
terminations are properly wired and tightened.
5. Re-energize the input device power, and check for proper
control voltage between the input terminal and signal common
terminal.
6. If proper input control voltage does not exist, first check
minimum signal common by verifying voltage between input
device power source and the input common terminal.
7. If proper input voltage does exist, first check the minimum input
current specification on the input module, and then measure the
current in the input circuit. Replace the input module if
necessary.
8. If the input modules check out “OK”, and proper voltage is
measured between input device source and input module
common terminal, test the input device and replace if necessary.
For more information on input troubleshooting see page 10-24.
5. Test Your Outputs
After you test all inputs, and have determined that they are
functioning properly, test the outputs following these steps:
1. Refer to page 8-2 to insure no motion will occur when any
controller output is energized.
2. Place the controller in the Program mode.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Starting Up Your Control System
8-7
3. Create an output test rung as shown below for each output
module configured.
MOV
SOURCE B3:"XX"
DEST O0:"XX"."Y"
Let “XX” represent slot number of the output currently selected.
“Y” represents output word identifier. This rung moves a word
of data from the bit file to the output file.
4. Save the output test program and current controller
configuration.
5. Transfer the output test program to the processor.
6. Put the controller in the Run mode.
7. Monitor the data in data file B3 on the programming device
display.
8. Enter B3: “XX” at address prompt to select the output to be
tested. “XX” represents the output slot number.
9. Enter 1 at data prompt for the address that corresponds to the bit
in the output word.
10. Observe the output status LED and the output device.
The output status LED should turn on. The output device should
be energized (unless you disconnected it to prevent machine
motion).
11. Reset the data value back to zero for the selected address and
both the output status LED and output device should
de-energize.
12. If the status LED and the output device correspond to data
settings in steps 10 and 11, repeat steps 8 through 11 for each
output.
If the status LEDs and output device states do not correspond to
the data settings in steps 9 and 11, follow the recommended
output troubleshooting steps in the next section.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
8-8
Starting Up Your Control System
Output Troubleshooting Steps
1. Make sure the processor is in the Run mode.
2. Verify proper addressing of the output test rung from the
previous page.
3. Using a programming device, locate the output data file and bit
data file. See if the status of the associated bits between these
files match.
4. If the status of the bits match in step 3, and if the status of the
output LED match the status of the bits, but the status of the
output device is different, continue to step 5.
If the output status LED does not match associated bit status,
check status file S:11 and S:12 I/O slot enables. Bits S:11/0
through S:11/15 and S:12/0 through S:12/14 should all be 1
enabling all I/O slots for the modular system.
If the output slot enable was verified, then try exchanging the
output module under test with identical hardware and retest. If
the new hardware works properly, replace the original.
5. Verify proper output voltage at the output terminal and then at
the output device.
6. De-energize the output circuit and check all output circuit
terminations and wire routes.
7. If proper output voltage does not exist at the output device and
the power source is adequate to drive the output device, test the
output device and replace it if necessary.
For more information on output troubleshooting, see page 10-25.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Starting Up Your Control System
6. Enter and Test Your
Program
8-9
After you test all inputs and outputs and they are functioning
properly, follow the steps below to safely and successfully enter and
test your specific application program. (For extra assistance, see the
Hand-Held Terminal User Manual or your programming software user
manual.)
1. Verify the offline program.
After the program has been entered in the offline edit file mode,
program verification may begin.
Remaining in the offline edit file mode, use the cursor keys
and/or search function of your programming device to inspect
every instruction and rung for errors.
2. Check your written program, rung for rung, against the program
entered into the offline memory. The most common errors
found in program entry are:
• incorrect addressing of instructions
• omission of an instruction
• more than one output instruction programmed using the
same address
3. Transfer the program into the processor:
a. Place your programming device online.
b. Place the processor into Program mode.
c. Select the download function when using the Hand-Held
Terminal or the restore function when using your
programming software.
4. Verify the online program transfer:
a. Select monitor file function.
b. Cursor through the program to verify that you selected the
right program.
5. Conduct a single-scan program test:
a. Select the monitor file function and place the cursor on the
first rung.
b. Select the Test mode.
c. Select Single-Scan (SSN) test. In this test mode, the processor
executes a single operating cycle, which includes reading the
inputs, executing the ladder program, and updating all data
without energizing the output circuits. However, the monitor
file function will identify output status as if outputs were
enabled.
Timers are also incremented a minimum of 10 milliseconds
each single scan.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
8-10
Starting Up Your Control System
d. Simulate the input conditions necessary to execute the current
monitored rung of the program. If it is not practical to
manually activate the input device, use the force function to
simulate the proper condition.
ATTENTION
!
Never reach into a machine to actuate a
device. Unexpected machine operation could
occur.
e. Activate a single operating scan as outlined in the
programming device user manual.
f. Verify the intended effects on the output instructions for that
rung and overall program logic effects.
g. Select the next program rung and repeat test procedures as
listed above until the entire program has been tested.
6. Conduct a continuous scan program test.
Once the individual single scan rung tests have been completed
and proper program operation verified, a continuous scan test is
appropriate before motion checkout.
The mode simulates the controller Run mode without energizing
the external outputs.
Use the following steps to further verify proper program and
system function operation.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Remain or return to an online condition with the processor.
Monitor the file.
Select Test mode.
Select the Continuous Scan test.
Simulate the input conditions necessary to execute system
functions.
f. Verify the intended operation of each system function and the
effects of other system functions.
ATTENTION
!
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Never reach into a machine to actuate a
device. Unexpected machine operation could
occur.
Starting Up Your Control System
7. Observe Control Motion
8-11
Now that program execution has been verified, checkout of control
motion can begin. All persons involved with the programming,
installation, layout design, machine or process design and
maintenance should be involved in making decisions for determining
the best and safest way to test the total system.
The following procedures are general in nature. Individual conditions
may warrant their modification. The basic approach is to initiate
testing with the least amount of machine motion. Only some outputs
are allowed to generate machine motion. Then additional machine
motion can be gradually added, thereby allowing any problems to be
detected more easily under controlled conditions. The following
procedure provides the steps for testing machine motion using one
output at a time.
ATTENTION
!
During all phases of checkout, station a person ready
to operate an emergency-stop switch if necessary.
The emergency-stop switch will de-energize the
master control relay and remove power from the
machine. This circuit must be hardwired only, it must
not be programmed.
Use the following procedures:
1. Identify the first output device to be tested and reconnect its
wiring.
ATTENTION
!
Contact with AC line potential may cause injury
to personnel. When reconnecting wiring, make
sure that the AC power disconnect switch is
opened.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
8-12
Starting Up Your Control System
2. Place the controller in the Run mode and observe the behavior
of the output device. To do this, simulate the input conditions
necessary to energize the output in the program. If it is not
practical to manually activate an input device, use the force
function to simulate the proper input condition.
ATTENTION
!
Never reach into a machine to actuate a
device, unexpected machine operation could
occur.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2, testing each output device, one at a time.
8. Conduct a Dry Run
ATTENTION
!
During all phases of checkout, station a person
ready to operate an emergency-stop switch if
necessary. The emergency-stop switch will
de-energize the master control relay and remove
power from the machine. This circuit must be
hardwired only, it must not be programmed.
After thoroughly checking out the controller system and program,
proceed with a dry run of the application with all of the output
devices enabled. This dry run will vary with the application. A
machine tool dry run would test the program with all outputs enabled
but without tooling an actual part.
After you check out the entire system, and your dry run has been
completed satisfactorily, we recommend that you load your program
into an EEPROM memory module for back-up program storage. Refer
to the Hand-Held Terminal User Manual (Catalog Number
1747-NP002) or your programming software’s user manual for
directions on loading the EEPROM from RAM.
This step completes start-up procedures. Your SLC programmable
controller is now ready for operation.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Chapter
9
Maintaining Your Control System
This chapter covers the following maintenance issues:
• handling and storing battery, Catalog Number 1747-BA
• installing and replacing the battery of the SLC 5/01 or SLC 5/02
processor
• replacing your SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 battery
• replacing retainer clips on an I/O module
• replacing a fuse on the power supply
See page 3-13 for important information on testing the Master Control
Relay Circuit and Preventive Maintenance.
Handling and Storing
Battery, Catalog Number
1747-BA
Follow the procedure below to ensure proper battery operation and
reduce personnel hazards.
Handling
• Use only for the intended operation.
• Do not ship or dispose of cells except according to
recommended procedures.
• Do not ship on passenger aircraft.
ATTENTION
!
Do not charge the batteries. An explosion could
result or the cells could overheat causing burns.
Do not open, puncture, crush, or otherwise mutilate
the batteries. A possibility of an explosion exists
and/or toxic, corrosive, and flammable liquids would
be exposed.
Do not incinerate or expose the batteries to high
temperatures. Do not attempt to solder batteries. An
explosion could result.
Do not short positive and negative terminals
together. Excessive heat can build up and cause
severe burns.
1
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
9-2
Maintaining Your Control System
Storing
Store the lithium batteries in a cool, dry environment, typically +20°C
to +25°C (+68°F to +77°F) and 40% to 60% relative humidity. Store the
batteries and a copy of the battery instruction sheet in the original
container, away from flammable materials.
Transporting
One or Two Batteries — Each battery contains 0.23 grams of lithium.
Therefore, up to two batteries can be shipped together within the
United States without restriction. Regulations governing shipment to
or within other countries may differ.
Three or More Batteries — Procedures for the transportation of three
or more batteries shipped together within the United States are
specified by the Department of Transportation (DOT) in the Code of
Federal Regulations, CFR49, “Transportation.” An exemption to these
regulations, DOT - E7052, covers the transport of certain hazardous
materials classified as flammable solids. This exemption authorizes
transport of lithium batteries by motor vehicle, rail freight, cargo
vessel, and cargo-only aircraft, providing certain conditions are met.
Transport by passenger aircraft is not permitted.
A special provision of DOT-E7052 (11th Rev., October 21, 1982, par.
8-a) provides that:
“Persons that receive cell and batteries covered by this
exemption may reship them pursuant to the provisions of 49
CFR 173.22a in any of these packages authorized in this
exemption including those in which they were received.”
The Code of Federal Regulations, 49 CFR 173.22a, relates to the use of
packaging authorized under exemptions. In part, it requires that you
must maintain a copy of the exemption at each facility where the
packaging is being used in connection with shipment under the
exemption.
Shipment of depleted batteries for disposal may be subject to specific
regulation of the countries involved or to regulations endorsed by
those countries, such as the IATA Restricted Articles Regulations of the
International Air Transport Association, Geneva, Switzerland.
IMPORTANT
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Regulations for transportation of lithium batteries
are periodically revised.
Maintaining Your Control System
9-3
Disposal
ATTENTION
!
Do not incinerate or dispose of lithium batteries in
general trash collection. Explosion or violent rupture
is possible. Batteries should be collected for disposal
in a manner to prevent against short circuiting,
compacting, or destruction of case integrity and
hermetic seal.
For disposal, batteries must be packaged and shipped in accordance
with transportation regulations, to a proper disposal site. The U.S.
Department of Transportation authorizes shipment of “Lithium
batteries for disposal” by motor vehicle only in regulation 173.1015 of
CFR 49 (effective January 5, 1983). For additional information contact:
U.S. Department of Transportation
Research and Special Programs Administration
400 Seventh Street, S.W.
Washington, D.C. 20590
Although the Environmental Protection Agency at this time has no
regulations specific to lithium batteries, the material contained may be
considered toxic, reactive, or corrosive. The person disposing of the
material is responsible for any hazard created in doing so. State and
local regulations may exist regarding the disposal of these materials.
For a lithium battery product safety data sheet, contact the
manufacturer:
Sanyo Energy Corporation
600 Supreme Drive
Bensenville, Il 60106
USA
Installing and Replacing
the Battery of the SLC 5/01
or SLC 5/02 Processor
or
Tadarand Electronics
2 Seaview Blvd.
Port Washington, NY 11050
USA
Back-up power for RAM is provided by a replaceable battery. The
lithium battery provides back-up for approximately five years for the
1747-L511 and two years for the 1747-L514 and 1747-L524. A red
BATTERY LOW LED alerts you when the battery voltage has fallen
below a threshold level.
Once the BATTERY LOW LED goes on, do not remove processor
power or your program may be lost. Replace the battery as soon as
possible. You can replace the battery while the processor is powered.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
9-4
Maintaining Your Control System
For battery installation or replacement do the following:
1. Open the door of the processor.
2. If you are:
installing a battery in a new processor (battery never installed
before), remove the jumper from the battery connector socket.
Store the jumper in safe place for possible future use without the
battery.
replacing an old battery, unplug the existing battery connector
and remove from the retainer clips. The figure below shows
where to install the battery in a SLC 5/01 or SLC 5/02 processor.
3. Insert a new or replacement battery in the holder making sure it
is held in by the retainer clips.
4. Plug the battery connector into the socket. See the following
figure.
White
Lead
Red Lead
Battery
Connector
Battery
+
Retainer
Clips
5. Close the processor door.
Replacing Your SLC 5/03,
SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05
Battery
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Your SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 processor provides back-up
power for RAM through a replaceable lithium battery. This battery
provides back-up for approximately 2 years. A BATT LED on the front
of the processor alerts you when the battery voltage has fallen below
a threshold level.
Maintaining Your Control System
9-5
To replace the lithium battery, follow these steps:
ATTENTION
!
Do not remove the processor from the SLC 500
chassis until all power is removed from the SLC 500
power supply.
1. Remove power from the SLC 500 power supply.
2. Remove the processor from the chassis by pressing the retainer
clips at both the top and bottom of the module and slide it out.
ATTENTION
!
Do not expose the processor to surfaces or
other areas that may typically hold an
electrostatic charge. Electrostatic charges can
alter or destroy memory.
3. Unplug the battery connector. The figure below shows the
battery connector location.
Battery
Red
White
Battery
Connector
IMPORTANT
The SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors
have a capacitor that provides at least 30 minutes of
battery back-up while the battery is disconnected.
Data in RAM is not lost if the battery is replaced
within 30 minutes.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
9-6
Maintaining Your Control System
4. Remove the battery from the retaining clips.
5. Insert a new battery into the battery retaining clips.
6. Plug the battery connector into the socket as shown in the figure
on page 9-5.
7. Insert the module back into the SLC 500 chassis.
8. Restore power to the SLC 500 power supply.
Replacing Retainer Clips on
an I/O Module
If it becomes necessary to replace the retainer clip (also called
self-locking tab), order Catalog Number 1746-R15 (4 per package).
Retainer Clip
Holding Tabs
Removing Damaged Retainer Clips
If necessary, pry off the broken retainer clip from the bottom with a
screwdriver. Do not twist it off. You can damage the module.
Retainer Clip
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Maintaining Your Control System
9-7
Installing New Retainer Clips
Insert one of the pins of the retainer clip into the hole in the I/O
module and then snap the other end in place.
Replacing a Fuse on the
Power Supply
To replace a fuse on the power supply (only for the 1746-P1, -P2, and
-P3), do the following:
1. Remove power from the SLC 500 power supply.
2. Open the door on the power supply and use a fuse puller to
remove the fuse.
ATTENTION
!
Use only replacement fuses of the type and
rating specified for the unit. Improper fuse
selection can result in equipment damage.
3. Install a replacement fuse. See page 2-14 for replacements. See
the figure below for fuse placement.
POWER
Fuse
3-Pin Jumper
ATTENTION
!
The exposed pins on the 3-pin jumper is
electrically live. Contact with the pin may
cause injury to personnel.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
9-8
Maintaining Your Control System
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Chapter
10
Troubleshooting
In this chapter, you will learn about:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Contacting Rockwell
Automation for Assistance
contacting Rockwell Automation for assistance
tips for troubleshooting your control system
troubleshooting the SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 processors
troubleshooting the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors
troubleshooting your input modules
troubleshooting your output modules
If you need to contact Rockwell Automation or local distributor for
assistance, it is helpful to obtain the following (prior to calling):
• processor type, series letter, operating system (OS) number
(obtained from the status file), firmware (FRN) number (see
label on side of processor module)
• processor LED status
• processor error codes (found in S:6 of status file)
• hardware types in system (I/O modules, chassis)
• revision of programming device (on the main menu of the
Hand-Held Terminal or programming software)
1
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
10-2
Troubleshooting
Tips for Troubleshooting
Your Control System
When troubleshooting, pay careful attention to these general
warnings:
ATTENTION
!
Have all personnel remain clear of the controller and
equipment when power is applied. The problem
may be intermittent and sudden unexpected
machine motion could result in injury. Have
someone ready to operate an emergency-stop switch
in case it becomes necessary to shut off power to the
controller equipment. Also, see NFPA 70E Part II for
additional guidelines for safety-related work
practices.
Never reach into a machine to actuate a switch since
unexpected machine motion can occur and cause
injury.
Remove all electrical power at the main power
disconnect switches before checking electrical
connections or inputs/outputs causing machine
motion.
The first step in the troubleshooting procedure is to identify the
problem and its source.
The majority of faults can be located and corrected by observing the
diagnostic indicators on the front of the power supply, processor unit
and I/O modules. These indicators, along with error codes identified
in the programming device user manual and programmer’s monitor,
help trace the source of the fault to the user’s input/output devices,
wiring, or the controller.
Removing Power
Before working on a SLC 500 modular system, always remove the
power supply input power at the main power disconnect switch.
The power LED on the power supply indicates that DC power is being
supplied to the chassis. The LED could be off when incoming power
is present.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Troubleshooting
10-3
Replacing Fuses
When replacing a fuse, be sure to remove all power from the system.
Program Alteration
There are several causes of alteration to the user program, including
extreme environmental conditions, Electromagnetic Interference
(EMI), improper grounding, improper wiring connections, and
unauthorized tampering. If you suspect the memory has been altered,
check the program against a previously saved program on an
EEPROM, UVPROM or Flash EPROM module.
Troubleshooting the
SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02
Processors
To receive the maximum benefit of this troubleshooting section,
follow these steps:
1. Identify the status of your processor LEDs. See Chapter 5 for a
description of LEDs and their different states.
2. Using the tables on the following pages, match your processor
and power supply LEDs with the status LEDs located in the first
column.
3. Once the status LEDs are matched to the appropriate table,
move across the table identifying error description and probable
causes.
4. Follow the recommended action steps for each probable cause
until the error is corrected.
5. If recommended actions do not correct the error, contact your
local Rockwell Automation sales office or distributor.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
10-4
Troubleshooting
Identifying SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 Processor Errors
The following LEDs and tables provide you with information
regarding error messages, possible cause(s) for the error, and
recommended action to resolve the error.
Table 10.1 SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 Processor Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
• All LEDs Off
• Status of SLC 5/02
Comm LED does not
matter
The Following
Error Exists
Probable Cause
Inadequate system No line power
power
Recommended Action
1. Verify proper line voltage and connections on the power
terminals.
2. Verify proper 120/240V power supply jumper selection.
See page 6-7.
Power supply fuse
blown
1. Check the incoming power fuse, check for proper
incoming power connections. Replace fuse.
2. If fuse blows again, replace the power supply. See page
9-7 on fuse replacement.
Power supply
overload
1. Remove line power to power supply. remove several
output modules from the chassis. wait five minutes.
reapply power.
2. If condition reoccurs, re-calculate module configuration
power required and verify proper power supply selection.
See page 2-13. This problem can occur intermittently if
power supply is slightly overloaded when output loading
and temperature varies.
Defective power
supply
1. Recheck other probable causes.
2. Monitor the line power to chassis power supply for
possible transient or shorting.
3. Replace the power supply.
• CPU Fault LED On
• All Other LEDs Off
• Status of SLC 5/02
Comm LED does not
matter
Inadequate system Improper line
power
power voltage
selection
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Verify proper 120/240V power supply jumper selection. See
page 6-7.
Troubleshooting
10-5
Table 10.1 SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 Processor Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
The Following
Error Exists
Probable Cause
• Power LED On
Processor not in
run mode
Either improper
mode selected or
user program logic
error
• All Other LEDs Off
• Status of SLC 5/02
Comm LED does not
matter
Recommended Action
1. Verify selected processor mode.
2. If in program or test mode, try to enter run mode.
3. If in suspend mode, check user program logic for
suspend instructions.
Refer to either the Hand-Held Terminal User Manual, publication
1747-NP002, or your programming software documentation.
Line power out of
operating range
1. Check proper 120/240V power supply jumper selection
and incoming power connections.
2. Monitor for proper line voltage at the incoming power
connections. See page 6-7 for power supply installation.
Improper seating of
power supply
and/or processor in
the chassis
1. Remove power and inspect the power supply and
processor chassis connections.
2. Re-install the devices and re-apply power.
IMPORTANT
The processor only operates in slot 0 of the first chassis.
Defective
processor, power
supply, or chassis
1. Attempt to put processor in run mode in existing chassis.
2. Place the processor in another chassis. Apply power,
reconfigure, and attempt to put processor in run mode. If
unsuccessful, replace the processor.
3. Place the power supply in another chassis and test. If
unsuccessful, replace the power supply. If successful,
replace the original chassis.
• Power LED On
• Run LED On
• All Other LEDs Off
• Status of SLC 5/02
Comm LED does not
matter
System Inoperable, User program logic
No Major CPU
error
Faults Detected
1. Monitor logic in Run mode and verify desired I/O status.
2. Check for minor CPU faults.
Refer to either the Hand-Held Terminal User Manual, publication
1747-NP002, or your programming software documentation.
Defective I/O
devices or I/O
wiring
Test inputs and outputs according to I/O troubleshooting
procedures starting on page 10-23.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
10-6
Troubleshooting
Table 10.1 SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 Processor Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
• Power LED On
The Following
Error Exists
Probable Cause
Recommended Action
CPU Fault
CPU memory error
Cycle power.
• CPU Fault LED On
Faulty memory
module
• All Other LEDs Off
• Status of SLC 5/02
Comm LED does not
matter
1. Remove power and then remove the memory module
from the processor.
2. Re-install the processor and re-apply power to the power
supply. If steady CPU Fault LED changes to flashing,
replace the existing memory module with a replacement
module.
See Chapter 6 for removing and installing memory modules.
Faulty processor or
power supply
1. Place the processor in another chassis not in the existing
system and cycle power. If steady CPU Fault LED
reappears, replace the processor.
2. If CPU Fault LED clears, monitor the line power going to
the power supply in existing system. Replace existing
system power supply if line power checks OK.
Processor firmware If upgrading the processor to a different firmware level, verify
installed incorrectly that the firmware chip orientation matches the upgrade kit
directions.
• Power LED On
CPU Major Fault
• CPU Fault LED
Flashing
• All Other LEDs Off
• Status of SLC 5/02
Comm LED does not
matter
Initial CPU factory
power-up condition
1. See Chapter 8 and follow the start-up procedures.
2. Clear processor memory to get rid of the flashing CPU
Fault LED.
Hardware/software
Major Fault
detected
(erratic, repetitive
power cycling can
cause a processor
major hardware
fault)
1. Monitor Status File word S:6 for major error code.
2. Refer to either the Hand-Held Terminal User Manual,
publication 1747-NP002, or the SLC 500 Instruction Set
Reference Manual, publication 1747-RM001, for error
codes and additional troubleshooting information.
3. Remove hardware/software condition causing fault.
4. Clear Status File S:1/13 major error bits, if set.
5. Clear Status File S:5 major error bits, if set.
6. Clear Status File S:6 major error code (optional).
7. Attempt to put processor in run mode.
If unsuccessful, repeat recommended action steps above.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Troubleshooting
10-7
Table 10.1 SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 Processor Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
• Power LED On
• Run LED On
• Forced I/O LED ON
The Following
Error Exists
Probable Cause
System does not
operate per ladder
logic
User forced I/O is
disabling operation
Refer to either the Hand-Held Terminal User Manual, publication
1747-NP002, or your programming software documentation.
• Status of SLC 5/02
Comm LED does not
matter
• Run LED On
• Forced I/O LED
Flashing
System does not
operate per
programmed
forces
User programmed
forces are not
enabled
• Status of SLC 5/02
Comm LED does not
matter
• CPU Fault LED
Flashing
• Battery Low LED On
• All Other LEDs Off
• Status of SLC 5/02
Comm LED does not
matter
1. Monitor program file on-line and identify programmed
forces.
2. Enable appropriate forces and test system conditions
again. Once forces are enabled, the Forced I/O LED turns
On (steady).
• All Other LEDs Off
• Power LED On
1. Monitor program file on-line and identify forced I/O.
2. Disable appropriate forces and test system conditions
again.
• All Other LEDs Off
• Power LED On
Recommended Action
Refer to either the Hand-Held Terminal User Manual, publication
1747-NP002, or your programming software documentation.
CPU Major Error
with Low or No
Battery Back-up
Loss of RAM during
power-down
1. Verify battery is connected. See page 9-3.
2. Replace the battery if you want RAM battery backup.
See page 9-3. If you want to back up RAM with the
capacitor in a SLC 5/01 (1747-L511), add or replace the
Battery Low LED jumper.
3. Refer to processor major fault recommended action
steps.
Refer to either the Hand-Held Terminal User Manual, publication
1747-NP002, or your programming software documentation.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
10-8
Troubleshooting
Identifying SLC 5/02 Processor Communication Errors
Table 10.2 SLC 5/02 Processor Communication Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
• Power LED On
• Comm LED Off
• CPU Fault LED Off or
Flashing
• Status of Run,
Forced I/O, and
Battery Low LEDs
does not matter
The Following
Error Exists
Probable Cause
The SLC 5/02
processor is not
receiving data. No
communication to
the programmer.
DH-485
communication
parameters are
improperly set up.
Recommended Action
1. Check communication parameters of programmer.
Programmer and processor baud rate must match.
Programmer and processor node addresses must be
different.
2. Try different combinations of:
a. baud rate (default is 19.2K)
b. node address (default is 1)
3. Try to increase the maximum node address.
(default is 31)
Bad Connection of
Communication
Device
1. Check cable continuity.
2. Check cable connections between programmer and
processor.
3. Check communication device (for example, the
1747-PIC). Replace if necessary.
Low or No Power
to Communication
Device
1. Verify proper power supply selection and backplane
loading. (1747-PIC and 1747-AIC draw power off the
backplane.)
2. Verify proper 120/240V power supply jumper selection.
See page 6-7.
• Power LED On
• Comm LED On
• CPU Fault LED Off or
Flashing
• Status of Run,
Forced I/O, and
Battery Low LEDs
does not matter
The SLC 5/02
processor is
receiving data, but
is not
communicating
with the
programmer
DH-485
communication
parameters are set
up improperly.
1. Check communication parameters of programmer.
Programmer and processor baud rate must match.
Programmer and processor node addresses must be
different.
2. Try different combinations of:
a. baud rate (default is 19.2K)
b. node address (default is 1)
3. Try to increase the maximum node address.
(default is 31)
• Power LED On
• CPU Fault LED On
A fatal error has
occurred
• Status of all other
LEDs does not
matter
Excessive noise or
a faulty SLC 5/02
processor
1. Cycle power to obtain flashing CPU Fault LED and default
program.
2. Examine the error code following the power cycle. Take
appropriate action.
3. Reload the program.
4. Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative if
the error persists.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting the
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and
SLC 5/05 Processors
10-9
Between the time you apply power to an SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or
SLC 5/05 processor and the communications are established via a
connected programming device, the only form of communication
between you and the processor is through the LED display.
When power is applied, all of the LEDs flash on and then off while
the processor conducts hardware tests. This is part of the normal
powerup sequence. Following the selftest by the processor, all the
LEDs again flash on momentarily. If a user program is in a running
state, the RUN LED will be on. If a fault exists within the processor,
the FLT LED is on.
To receive the maximum benefit of this troubleshooting section,
follow these steps:
1. Identify the status of your processor LEDs. See Chapter 5 for
description of LEDs and their different states.
2. Using the tables on the following pages, match your processor
and power supply LEDs with the status LEDs located in the first
column.
3. Once the status LEDs are matched to the appropriate table,
move across the table identifying error description and probable
causes.
4. Then follow the recommended action steps for each probable
cause until the cause is identified.
5. If recommended actions do not identify the trouble cause,
contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or
distributor.
Clearing SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processor Faults Using
the Keyswitch
Toggle the keyswitch from RUN to PROG and then back to RUN; this
clears the fault. If the keyswitch is left in the RUN position, the
processor mode cannot be changed from a programmer/operator
interface device. If you return the keyswitch to the REM position, you
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
10-10
Troubleshooting
can then use a programmer/operator interface device to change the
processor mode.
ATTENTION
If you clear a processor fault using the keyswitch,
the processor immediately enters the Run mode.
!
Identifying SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processor Errors
The following LEDs and tables provide you with information
regarding error messages, possible cause(s) for the error, and
recommended action to resolve the error.
Table 10.3 SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processor Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
• All LEDs Off
• Status of any
Communication LED
does not matter
The Following
Error Exists
Probable Cause
Inadequate system No line power
power
Recommended Action
1. Verify proper line voltage and connections on the power
terminals.
2. Verify proper 120/240V power supply jumper selection.
See page 6-7.
Power supply fuse
blown
1. Check the incoming power fuse, check for proper
incoming power connections. Replace fuse.
2. If fuse blows again, replace the power supply.
See page 9-7 on fuse replacement.
Power supply
overload
1. Remove line power to power supply. remove several
output modules from the chassis. wait five minutes.
reapply power.
2. If condition reoccurs, re-calculate module configuration
power required and verify proper power supply selection.
See page 2-13. This problem can occur intermittently if
power supply is slightly overloaded when output loading
and temperature varies.
Defective power
supply
1. Recheck other probable causes.
2. Monitor the line power to chassis power supply for
possible transient or shorting.
3. Replace the power supply.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Troubleshooting
10-11
Table 10.3 SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processor Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
• FLT LED On
• All Other LEDs Off
• Status of any
Communication LED
does not matter
• Power LED On
• All Other LEDs Off
• Status of any
Communication LED
does not matter
The Following
Error Exists
Probable Cause
Inadequate system Improper line
power
power voltage
selection
Processor not in
run mode
Either improper
mode selected or
user program logic
error
Recommended Action
Verify proper 120/240V power supply jumper selection. See
page 6-7.
1. Verify selected processor mode.
2. If in program or test mode, try to enter run mode.
a. If the keyswitch is in the REM position and there is no
key, use the programmer.
b. If the keyswitch is in the REM or PROG position and
you have the key, toggle to the RUN position.
3. If in suspend mode, check user program logic for
suspend instructions.
Refer to your programming software documentation.
Line power out of
operating range
1. Check proper 120/240V power supply jumper selection
and incoming power connections.
2. Monitor for proper line voltage at the incoming power
connections. See page 6-7 for power supply installation.
Improper seating of
power supply
and/or processor in
the chassis
1. Remove power and inspect the power supply and
processor chassis connections.
2. Re-install the devices and re-apply power.
IMPORTANT
The processor only operates in slot 0 of the first chassis.
Defective
processor, power
supply, or chassis
1. Attempt to put processor in run mode in existing chassis.
a. If the keyswitch is in the REM position and there is no
key, use the programmer.
b. If the keyswitch is in the REM or PROG position and
you have the key, toggle to the RUN position.
2. Place the processor in another chassis. Apply power,
reconfigure, and attempt to put processor in run mode. If
unsuccessful, replace the processor.
3. Place the power supply in another chassis and test. If
unsuccessful, replace the power supply. If successful,
replace the original chassis.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
10-12
Troubleshooting
Table 10.3 SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processor Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
• Power LED On
• Run LED On
• All Other LEDs Off
The Following
Error Exists
System Inoperable, User program logic
No Major CPU
error
Faults Detected
Recommended Action
1. Monitor logic in Run mode and verify desired I/O status.
2. Check for minor CPU faults.
Refer to your programming software documentation.
• Status of any
Communication LED
does not matter
• Power LED On
Probable Cause
CPU Fault
• CPU Fault LED On
• All Other LEDs Off
Defective I/O
devices or I/O
wiring
Test inputs and outputs according to I/O troubleshooting
procedures starting on page 10-23.
CPU memory error
Cycle power.
Faulty memory
module
• Status of any
Communication LED
does not matter
1. Remove power and then remove the memory module
from the processor.
2. Re-install the processor and re-apply power to the power
supply. If steady CPU Fault LED changes to flashing,
replace the existing memory module with a replacement
module.
Refer to 6 for removing and installing memory modules.
Faulty processor or
power supply
1. Place the processor in another chassis not in the existing
system and cycle power. If steady CPU Fault LED
reappears, replace the processor.
2. If CPU Fault LED clears, monitor the line power going to
the power supply in existing system. Replace existing
system power supply if line power checks OK.
Processor firmware If upgrading the processor to a different firmware level, verify
installed incorrectly that the firmware chip orientation matches the upgrade kit
directions.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Troubleshooting
10-13
Table 10.3 SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processor Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
The Following
Error Exists
Probable Cause
• Power LED On
CPU Major Fault
Initial CPU factory
power-up condition
• CPU Fault LED
Flashing
• All Other LEDs Off
• Status of any
Communication LED
does not matter
Recommended Action
1. See 8 and follow the start-up procedures.
2. Clear processor memory to get rid of the flashing CPU
Fault LED.
Hardware/software
Major Fault
detected
(erratic, repetitive
power cycling can
cause a processor
major hardware
fault)
1. If the error occurred during the download of a new
program to the processor, check the position of the J4
jumper. See page 10-19. If the jumper is not in the
protected position:
a. Place the jumper in the protected position
b. Re-download a valid user program to the processor
2. Use programmer to monitor and clear the fault (or if
keyswitch in REM position):
a. Monitor Status File word S:6 for major error code.
b. Refer to your programming software documentation or
the Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication
1747-RM001, for error codes and additional
troubleshooting information.
c. Remove hardware/software condition causing fault.
d. Clear Status File S:1/13 major error bits, if set.
e. Clear Status File S:5 major error bits, if set.
f. Clear Status File S:6 major error code (optional).
g. Attempt to put processor in run mode.
If unsuccessful, repeat recommended action steps
above.
3. Use the keyswitch to clear the fault. Toggle the
keyswitch to PROG and back to RUN. (See page 10-9). If
fault occurs again, use programmer to get error code and
determine the source of the problem.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
10-14
Troubleshooting
Table 10.3 SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processor Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
• Power LED On
• Run LED On
• Force LED ON
The Following
Error Exists
Probable Cause
System does not
operate per ladder
logic
User forced I/O is
disabling operation
Refer to your programming software documentation.
• Status of any
Communication LED
does not matter
• Run LED On
• Force LED Flashing
• All Other LEDs Off
System does not
operate per
programmed
forces
User programmed
forces are not
enabled
• FLT LED Flashing
• Batt LED On
1. Monitor program file on-line and identify programmed
forces.
2. Enable appropriate forces and test system conditions
again. Once forces are enabled, the Force LED turns On
(steady).
• Status of any
Communication LED
does not matter
• Power LED On
1. Monitor program file on-line and identify forced I/O.
2. Disable appropriate forces and test system conditions
again.
• All Other LEDs Off
• Power LED On
Recommended Action
Refer to your programming software documentation.
CPU Major Error
with Low or No
Battery Back-up
Loss of RAM during
power-down
1. Verify battery is connected. See page 9-3.
2. Replace the battery if you want RAM battery backup.
See page 9-3.
• All Other LEDs Off
3. Refer to processor major fault recommended action
steps.
• Status of any
Communication LED
does not matter
Refer to your programming software documentation.
Identifying SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processor
Communication Errors
Table 10.4 SLC 5/03. SLC 4/04, and SLC 5/05 Communication Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
• Power LED On
• DH-485, DH+, or
ENET LED Off
The Following
Error Exists
Probable Cause
Fatal Error and No
Communication
Inadequate System
Power
• FLT LED Off or
Flashing
• Status of Run, Force,
Batt, and RS232
LEDs does not
matter
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Recommended Action
1. Check line power.
2. Check 120/240V power supply jumper selection. See
page 6-7. Also, see the recommended actions for
inadequate system power on page 10-10.
Communication
Channel is Shut
Down
Check communication channel configuration with your
programming software. Also, see page 10-21 to return the
processor to initial factory conditions.
Communication
Channel is
Damaged
Replace the processor.
Troubleshooting
10-15
Table 10.4 SLC 5/03. SLC 4/04, and SLC 5/05 Communication Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
• Power LED On
• RS232 LED Off
The Following
Error Exists
Probable Cause
Fatal Error and No
Communication
Inadequate System
Power
1. Check line power.
2. Check 120/240V power supply jumper selection. See
page 6-7. Also, see the recommended actions for
inadequate system power on page 10-10.
• FLT LED Off or
Flashing
• Status of Run; Force;
DH-485, DH+, or
ENET; or Batt LEDs
does not matter
Recommended Action
Communication
Channel is Shut
Down
Check communication channel configuration with your
programming software. Also, see page 10-21 to return the
processor to initial factory conditions.
Communication
Channel is
Damaged
Replace the processor.
Channel
Configured for DF1
or User Mode
See your programming software documentation for channel
configuration information.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
10-16
Troubleshooting
Table 10.4 SLC 5/03. SLC 4/04, and SLC 5/05 Communication Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
The Following
Error Exists
• Power LED On
The SLC 5/03 or
SLC 5/04
processor is trying
to establish
• FLT LED Off or
communication,
Flashing
but cannot find
• Status of Run, Force, other active nodes.
(The DH-485 or
Batt, and RS232
DH+ LED is
LEDs does not
flashing green.)
matter
• DH-485, DH+, or
ENET LED Flashing
Probable Cause
DH-485 or DH+
communication
parameters are
improperly set up.
Recommended Action
1. Check communication parameters of programmer.
Programmer and processor baud rate must match.
Programmer and processor node addresses must be
different.
2. Try different combinations of:
a. baud rate (default is 19.2K for DH-485 and 57.6K for
DH+)
b. node address (default is 1)
3. Try to increase the maximum node address.
(default is 31 for DH-485)
Refer to your programming software for channel configuration
information.
Bad Connection of
Communication
Device
1. Check cable continuity.
2. Check cable connections between programmer and
processor.
3. Check communication device (for example, the
1747-PIC). replace if necessary.
Low or No Power
to Communication
Device
1. Verify proper power supply selection and backplane
loading. (1747-PIC and 1747-AIC draw power off the
backplane.)
2. Verify proper 120/240V power supply jumper selection.
See page 6-7.
Duplicate drop is
detected. (The DH+
LED is flashing
red.)
An ENET fault is
being reported via
a code. (The ENET
LED is flashing
red.)
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Another DH+
device is already
on the DH+
network at this
node address.
A hardware or
software fault has
occurred.
1. Remove this device from the DH+ network.
2. Cycle power.
3. Reset the node address to an unused node before
reconnecting device to the DH+ network. (Can perform
reset if on-line via channel 0 RS-232 port without
disconnecting from DH+.)
Contact Rockwell Automation for assistance.
Troubleshooting
10-17
Table 10.4 SLC 5/03. SLC 4/04, and SLC 5/05 Communication Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
• Power LED On
• RS232 LED Flashing
• FLT LED Off or
Flashing
• Status of Run; Force;
DH-485, DH+, or
ENET; or Batt LEDs
does not matter
The Following
Error Exists
Probable Cause
The processor is
trying to establish
communication,
but cannot find
other active nodes.
DH-485
communication
parameters are set
up improperly.
Recommended Action
1. Check communication parameters of programmer.
Programmer and processor baud rate must match.
Programmer and processor node addresses must be
different.
2. Try different combinations of:
a. baud rate (default is 19.2K for DH-485)
b. node address (default is 1)
3. Try to increase the maximum node address. (default is 31
for DH-485)
Refer to your programming software for channel configuration
information.
Bad Connection of
Communication
Device
1. Check cable continuity.
2. Check cable connections between programmer and
processor.
3. Check communication device (for example, the
1747-PIC). replace if necessary.
Low or No Power
to Communication
Device
1. Verify proper power supply selection and backplane
loading. (1747-PIC and 1747-AIC draw power off the
backplane.)
2. Verify proper 120/240V power supply jumper selection.
See page 6-7.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
10-18
Troubleshooting
Table 10.4 SLC 5/03. SLC 4/04, and SLC 5/05 Communication Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
The Following
Error Exists
Probable Cause
Recommended Action
• Power LED On
The processor is
not transmitting.
Channel is
configured for
DH-485 mode.
Check communication parameters of channel configuration.
Also, refer to your programming software documentation.
RS232/DF1
parameters are set
up improperly.
Check the following communication parameters of programmer
and channel configuration:
• RS232 LED Off
• FLT LED Off or
Flashing
• Status of Run; Force;
DH-485, DH+, or
ENET; or Batt LEDs
does not matter
1. baud rate - programmer and processor baud rates must
match
2. DF1 node addresses (default is 1 for half-duplex, and 9
for full-duplex) - programmer and processor addresses
must be different
3. error checking
4. number of data bits
Hardware problem
1. Check cable connections.
2. Check cable pinouts. Also, see Appendix B for RS-232
pinouts.
• Power LED On
• FLT LED On
A fatal error has
occurred
• Status of all other
LEDs does not
matter
Excessive noise or
a faulty processor
1. Cycle power to obtain flashing FLT LED and default
program.
2. Examine the error code following the power cycle. Take
appropriate action.
3. Reload the program.
4. Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative if
the error persists.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Troubleshooting
Identifying Processor
Errors while Downloading
an Operating System
10-19
The download process of the operating system by the SLC 5/03,
SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors takes up to 2.5 minutes. While the
download is in progress, the RUN and FLT LEDs remain off. The other
four LEDs — RS232, DH485 (DH+on the SLC 5/04 and ENET on the
SLC 5/05), FORCE, and BATT — turn on and off in a walking bit
sequence. If the download is successful, these four LEDs remain on
together.
ATTENTION
!
Jumper J4, located on the bottom corner of the
motherboard, provides write-protection from any
download of a new operating system. The “out of
the box” position of this jumper is “PROTECT,” or
write-protect. Without the jumper, the processors are
write-protected.
Catalog and Serial
Number Label
Place the operating
system upgrade
label here.
The SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
processors are protected from the operating
system download when jumper J4 is in this
position:
OR
The SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
processors accept the operating system
download when jumper J4 is in this position:
SLC 500
PLACE OS UPGRADE LABEL HERE
PROCESSOR UNIT
OPERATING SYSTEM INFO
SER
FAC OS #
CAT
SER
FRN
CURRENT REQUIREMENTS:
PROTECT
WHITE
RED
SERIAL NO.
PROC. REV.
+
-
BATTERY
1
UL
LISTED IND. CONT. EQ.
FOR HAZ. LOC. A196
1A @ 5 VDC
200mA @ 24 VDC
SA ®
CLASS 1, GROUPS A, B, C AND D, DIV. 2
OPERATING TEMPERATURE CODE T3C
3
PROGRAM
J4
MADE IN USA
Daughter Board
Mother Board
Operating System
Upgrade/Memory Module
Socket
Jumper J4
If the download is not successful, the FLT LED turns on and a
combination of LEDs flash on and off indicating an error condition.
The following table provides you with information regarding error
messages, possible cause(s) for the error, and recommended action to
resolve the error.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
10-20
Troubleshooting
On Off On On On Off On Hardware
Watchdog
Timeout
Major hardware
failure due to noise,
improper grounding, or
poor power source.
Cycle power and see if the error repeats itself. If the
error clears, you should be able to download the
operating system. If the error persists, contact your
Rockwell Automation representative.
On Off On On On Off Off Fatal Hardware
Error
Major hardware
failure due to noise,
improper grounding, or
poor power source.
Cycle power and see if the error repeats itself. If the
error clears, you should be able to download the
operating system. If the error persists, contact your
Rockwell Automation representative.
On Off Off On Off On On Corrupted
Operating
System Memory
Module
The operating system
on the Flash EPROM is
corrupt.
Cycle power and see if the error repeats itself. If the
error persists, either contact your Rockwell Automation
representative for a new operating system memory
module, or download the old operating system.
On Off On On Off On Off Flash EPROM
Failure
The processor flash is
corrupt.
Cycle power and see if the error repeats itself. If the
error clears, you should be able to download the
operating system. If the error persists, contact your
Rockwell Automation representative.
On Off On On On On Off Corrupt or
Missing
Operating
System
The operating system
is missing or has been
corrupted.
Cycle power and see if the error repeats itself. If the
error clears, you should be able to download the
operating system. If the error persists, contact your
Rockwell Automation representative for a new
operating system.
On Off On On Off On On Downloadable
Operating
System Failure
Failure during
transmission of
downloadable
operating system.
Download the operating system.
On Off Off On On On Off Incompatible
Platform
The upgrade of the
operating system is
incompatible with the
processor hardware.
Use an operating system that is compatible with your
processor hardware.
On Off Off On On On On Memory
Write-Protected
An attempt was made
to download the
operating system onto
write-protected
memory.
Change the jumper on the processor to the program
position.
RS232
The Following
Error Exists
BATT
Cycle power and see if the error repeats itself. If the
error clears, you should be able to download the
operating system. If the error persists, contact your
Rockwell Automation representative.
DH485/DH+/ENET
Major hardware
failure due to noise,
improper grounding, or
poor power source.
FLT
On Off Off On Off On Off NVRAM error
FORCE
Recommended Action
RUN
Probable Cause
POWER
LED Status
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Troubleshooting
10-21
Returning the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processors to
“Initial Factory Conditions”
We only recommend this procedure if the communication channels
have been shut down due to the configuration parameters, or if you
absolutely cannot establish communications with the processor.
ATTENTION
!
If you return the processor to the initial factory
conditions, the user program and communication
configurations are returned to their default settings.
To return the processor to initial factory conditions:
1. Remove power from the SLC 500 power supply.
2. Remove the processor from the chassis.
3. Disconnect the battery by removing the battery connector from
its socket.
4. Locate the VBB and GND connections on the right side of the
motherboard.
5. Place a small bladed screwdriver across the VBB and GND
connections and hold for 60 seconds. This returns the processor
to the initial factory conditions.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
10-22
Troubleshooting
VBB
GND
SLC 5/03 (1747-L531 and 1747-L532)
GND
VBB
Keyswitch
Mother Board
Right Side View
SLC 5/04 (1747-L541, 1747-L542, and 1747-L543)
SLC 5/05 (1747-L551, 1747-L552, and 1747-L553)
GND
Keyswitch
GND VBB
Mother Board
Right Side View
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
VBB
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Your Input
Modules
10-23
The following will assist you in troubleshooting your input modules.
Input Circuit Operation
An input circuit responds to an input signal in the following manner:
1. An input filter removes false signals due to contact bounce or
electrical interference.
2. Opto-electrical isolation protects the input circuit and backplane
circuits by isolating logic circuits from input signals.
3. Logic circuits process the signal.
4. An input LED turns on or off indicating the status of the
corresponding input device.
Input
Input
Conditioning
Opto-Electrical
Isolation
Logic
Circuits
Backplane
LED
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
10-24
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Your Input Modules
If your Input
Circuit LED is
And Your Input
Device is
And
On
On/Closed/Activated
Your input device will not turn Device is shorted or
off.
damaged.
Verify device operation. Replace
device.
Your program operates as
though it is off.
Input circuit is
damaged.
Verify proper wiring. Try other input
circuit. Replace module.
Input is forced off in
program.
Check the FORCED I/O or FORCE LED
on processor and remove forces.
Input device Off-state
leakage current
exceeds input circuit
specification.
Check device and input circuit
specifications. Use load resistor to
bleed-off current.
Input device is shorted
or damaged.
Verify device operation. Replace
device.
Input circuit is
damaged.
Verify proper wiring. Try other input
circuit. Replace module.
Input circuit is
incompatible.
Check specification and sink/source
compatibility (if DC input).
Off/Open/Deactivated Your program operates as
though it is on and/or the
input circuit will not turn off.
Off
On/Closed/Activated
Your program operates as
though it is off and/or the
input circuit will not turn on.
Probable Cause
Low voltage across the Check the voltage across input circuit
input.
and check source voltage.
Incorrect wiring or an
open circuit.
Check wiring and COMmon
connections.
Input signal turn-on
time too fast for input
circuit.
Check timing specifications.
Input circuit is
damaged.
Verify proper wiring. Try other input
circuit. Replace module.
Off/Open/Deactivated Your input device will not turn Input device is shorted
on.
or damaged.
Your program operates as
though it is on.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Recommended Action
Verify operation. Replace device.
Input is forced on in
program.
Check processor FORCED I/O or
FORCE LED and remove forces. Verify
proper wiring. Try other input circuit.
Replace module.
Input circuit is
damaged.
Verify proper wiring. Try other input
circuit. Replace module.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Your
Output Modules
10-25
The following will assist you in troubleshooting your output modules.
Output Circuit Operation
An output circuit controls the output signal in the following manner:
1. Logic circuits determine the output status.
2. An output LED indicates the status of the output signal.
3. Opto-electrical isolation separates output circuit logic and
backplane circuits from field signals.
4. The output driver turns the corresponding output on or off.
Backplane
Logic
Circuits
Opto-Electrical
Isolation
Logic
Circuits
Output
Drivers
Output
LED
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
10-26
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Your Output Modules
If your
Output
Circuit
LED is
And Your
Output Device
is
And
Probable Cause
Recommended Action
On
On/Energized
Your program
indicates that the
output circuit is
off or the output
circuit will not
turn off.
Programming problem.
Check for duplicate outputs and addresses using the
search function.
If using subroutines, outputs are left in their last state
when not executing subroutines.
Use the force function to force output off. If this does not
force the output off, output circuit is damaged. If the
output does force off, then check again for
logic/programming problem.
Off/De-energized Your output device
will not turn on
and the program
indicates that it is
on.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Output is forced on in
program.
Check processor FORCED I/O or FORCE LED and remove
forces.
Output circuit is
damaged.
Use the force function to force the output off. If this forces
the output off, then there is a logic/programming problem.
If this does not force the output off, the output circuit is
damaged. Try other output circuit. Replace module.
Low or no voltage across
the load.
Measure the source voltage and check specifications.
Incorrect wiring or open
circuit.
Check wiring and COMmon connections.
Output device is
incompatible.
Check specifications and sink/source compatibility (if DC
output).
Output circuit is
damaged.
Check wiring. Try other output circuit. Replace module.
Troubleshooting
10-27
If your
Output
Circuit
LED is
And Your
Output Device
is
And
Probable Cause
Recommended Action
Off
On/Energized
Your output device
will not turn off
and the program
indicates that it is
off.
Output device is
incompatible.
Check specifications.
Output circuit off-state
leakage current may
exceed output device
specification.
Check specifications. Use load resistor to bleed off
leakage current. See output specifications.
Incorrect wiring.
Check wiring. Disconnect from SLC and verify device
operation.
Output device is shorted
or damaged.
Verify device operation. Replace device.
Output circuit is
damaged.
Check wiring. Try other output circuit. Replace module.
Off/De-energized Your program
Programming problem.
indicates that the
output circuit is on
or the output
circuit will not
turn on.
Check for duplicate outputs and addresses using search
function.
If using subroutines, outputs are left in their last state
when not executing subroutines.
Use the force function to force output on. If this does not
force the output on, output circuit is damaged. If the output
does force on, then check again for logic/programming
problem.
Output is forced off in
program.
Check processor FORCED I/O or FORCE LED and remove
forces.
Output circuit is
damaged.
Use the force function to force the output on. If this forces
the output on, then there is a logic/programming problem.
If this does not force the output on, the output circuit is
damaged. Try other output circuit. Replace module.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
10-28
Troubleshooting
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Chapter
11
Replacement Parts
This chapter provides a list of replacement parts and a list of
replacement terminal blocks for your SLC 500 controller.
Replacement Cables and
Connectors
Description
Catalog
Number
Chassis Interconnect Cable - The 1746-C7 is a 152.4 mm (6 in.) ribbon cable used when linking modular hardware style
chassis up to 152.4 mm (6 in.) apart in an enclosure.
1746-C7
Chassis Interconnect Cable - The 1746-C9 is a 914.4 mm (36 in.) cable used when linking modular hardware style
chassis from 152.4 mm (6 in.) up to 914.4 mm (36 in.) apart in an enclosure.
1746-C9
Chassis Interconnect Cable - The 1746-C16 is a 1.27m (50 in.) cable used when linking modular hardware style chassis
from 0.914m (36 in.) up to 1.27m (50 in.) apart in an enclosure. This is the longest chassis interconnect cable
recommended by Allen-Bradley.
1746-C16
32 Point Mating Connector - This connector is used for terminating a user-made cable. It is compatible with the
1746-N3
Catalog Number 1492-IFM40x, DIN RAIL mountable terminal block interface module (used with 32-point I/O modules).
Replacement Processor to Peripheral Programming/Communication Cable - This 1.8 m (6 ft) cable is used to connect
the interface converter to the SLC 500 controller when using personal computer interface software. This cable is also
used to connect the Hand-Held Terminal to the SLC 500 controller and to connect the Data Table Access Module to the
SLC 500 controller.
1747-C10
Replacement Processor to Isolated Link Coupler Cable - This 304.8 mm (12 in.) cable is used to connect the SLC 500
controller to the isolated link coupler.
1747-C11
Communication Module to Isolated Link Coupler Cable - This 914.4 mm (36 in.) cable is used to connect communication
modules (i.e. 1746-BAS and 1747-KE) to the isolated link coupler. The isolated link coupler must be powered by an
external power supply or connected to a device with a Catalog Number 1747-C10 or 1747-C11 cable.
1747-C13
Replacement Processor to Peripheral Programming/Communication Cable - This 6.096 m (20 ft) cable is used to
connect the interface converter to the SLC 500 controller when using personal computer interface software. This cable
is also used to connect the Hand-Held Terminal to the SLC 500 controller and to connect the Data Table Access Module
to the SLC 500 controller.
1747-C20
SLC 5/03, 5/04, and 5/05 RS-232 Programmer Cable - This 3.96 m (12 ft) cable has two 9-pin DTE connectors and is
used to connect the SLC processor RS-232 channel (channel 0) to a personal computer serial port.
1747-CP3
SLC 5/03, 5/04, and 5/05 Communication Cable - This 45 cm (17.7 in.) cable has two 9-pin DTE connectors and is used 1761-CBL-AC00
to connect the SLC processor RS-232 channel (channel 0) to port 1 of the 1761-NET-AIC Advanced Interface Converter.
SLC 5/03, 5/04, and 5/05 Communication Cable - This 2 m (6.5 in.) cable has a 9-pin DTE and an 8-pin mini DIN
connector and is used to connect the SLC processor RS-232 channel (channel 0) to port 2 of the 1761-NET-AIC
Advanced Interface Converter.
1761-CBL-PM02
SLC 5/03, 5/04, and 5/05 Communication Cable - This 45 cm (17.7 in.) cable has a 9-pin DTE and an 8-pin mini DIN
connector and is used to connect the SLC processor RS-232 channel (channel 0) to port 2 of the 1761-NET-AIC
Advanced Interface Converter.
1761-CBL-AP00
1
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
11-2
Replacement Parts
Description
Catalog
Number
RJ45 to 6-Pin Phoenix Connector Communication Cable - This 3 m (9.8 ft) cable is used to connect the SLC 500 fixed,
SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, and SLC 5/03 processor RJ45 port to port 3 of the 1761-NET-AIC Advanced Interface Converter.
1761-CBL-AS03
RJ45 to 6-Pin Phoenix Connector Communication Cable - This 9.5 m (31.2 ft) cable is used to connect the SLC 500 fixed,
SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, and SLC 5/03 processor RJ45 port to port 3 of the 1761-NET-AIC Advanced Interface Converter.
1761-CBL-AS09
Catalog 1492 Pre-wired Interface Cables
1492
Cable Connectivity Summary
For Connectivity Between These Devices
Preferred Cable
Catalog Number
These Cables
May Be Used
1746-A4, -A7, -A10, or -A13 Chassis
1746-C7
1746-C9
1746-C16
-
1747-PIC Personal Interface Converter
1747-AIC Isolated Link Coupler
1747-PT1 Hand-Held Programming
SLC 500 Processors (DH-485 Channel)
Terminal
1747-DTAM-E Data Table Access Module
2707-Lxxx, -Vxxx DTAM Plus
1747-C10
1747-C11
1747-C20
1747-AIC Isolated Link Coupler
SLC 500 Processors (DH-485 Channel)
1747-C11
1747-C10
1747-C13
1747-C20
1747-KE DH-485/RS-232C Interface
Module
1746-BAS BASIC Module
1747-AIC Isolated Link Coupler
1747-C13
1747-C11
1747-C10
1746-xx32 32 Point I/O Modules
1492-IFM40x
1492-CABLExH
-
SLC 5/03 Processor (RS-232 Channel 0)
SLC 5/04 Processor (RS-232 Channel 0)
SLC 5/05 Processor (RS-232 Channel 0)
Personal Computer Serial Port (9-Pin
DTE)
1747-CP3
-
1746-I/O
1492-IFMxx Interface Modules
1492-CABLExx
-
1747-SN Remote I/O Scanner
Remote I/O Network
1747-DCM Direct Communication Module
1747-ASB SLC Remote I/O Adapter
Module
SLC 5/04 Processors (1747-L541, -542,
and -543)
Belden 9463
-
1747-AIC Isolated Link Coupler
1770-KF3 DH-485 Communication
Interface
Belden 9842 or 3106A
-
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
1746-A4, -A7, -A10, or -A13 Chassis
1747-AIC Isolated Link Coupler
Replacement Parts
11-3
Replacement Terminal Blocks
Description
Catalog
Number
Replacement Terminal Block (Blue) — Used with DC I/O modules, Catalog Numbers 1746-IB16, -IC16, -IH16, -IV16,
-OBP8, -OB16, -OB16E, -OBP16, -OVP16 -OV16, -IN16, -IG16, -OG16
1746-RT25B
Replacement Terminal Block (Orange) — Used with relay output modules, Catalog Numbers 1746-OW16, -OX8
1746-RT25C
Replacement Terminal Block (Green) — Used with Specialty I/O modules, Catalog Numbers 1746-HSCE, -IO12, -NR4,
-NI8
1746-RT25G
Replacement Terminal Block (Red) — Used with AC I/O modules, Catalog Numbers 1746-IA16, -OA16, -IM16, -OAP12 1746-RT25R
Replacement Terminal Block — 2-position terminal block used with analog outputs, Catalog Numbers 1746-NO4I,
-NO4V
1746-RT26
Replacement Terminal Block — 8-position terminal block used with analog outputs, Catalog Numbers 1746-NO4I,
-NO4V
1746-RT27
Replacement Terminal Block — Used with analog input modules, Catalog Numbers 1746-NI4, -NIO4I, -NIO4V, -FIO4I,
-FIO4V
1746-RT28
Replacement Terminal Block — Used with RIO Communication Modules, Catalog Numbers 1747-SN, -DSN, -DCM
1746-RT29
Replacement Terminal Block — 6-position DH-485 plug/connector;
used with DH-485 Link Coupler, Catalog Number 1747-AIC and Advanced Interface Converter, Catalog Number
1761-NET-AIC
1746-RT30
Replacement Terminal Block — Used with SLC 500 Remote I/O Adapter Module, Catalog Number 1747-ASB
1746-RT31
Replacement Terminal Block — Used with Thermocouple/mV Module, Catalog Number 1746-NT4
1746-RT32
Replacement Terminal Block — 3-position DH+ connector; used with SLC 5/04 Processors, Catalog Numbers
1747-L541, 1747-L542, -L542P, 1747-L543
1746-RT33
Replacement Terminal Block (Green) — Used with Thermocouple/mV Input Module, Catalog Number 1746-NT8
1746-RT34
Replacement Terminal Block (Green) — Used with RTD/resistance Input Module, Catalog Number 1746-NR8
1746-RT35
Other Replacement Hardware
Description
Catalog
Number
Replacement Fuses — Five fuses per package. Orders must be for multiples of five. (Price is per fuse.)
-
Catalog Number for 1746-P1 power supply.
1746-F1
Catalog Number for 1746-P2 power supply.
1746-F2
Catalog Number for 1746-P3 power supply.
1746-F3
Fixed I/O AC units, MDL 1.25 Ampere.
1746-F4
Fixed I/O DC units, MDL 1.6 Ampere.
1746-F5
Catalog Numbers for 1746-OBP16 and 1746-OVP16 output modules.
1746-F8
Catalog Numbers for 1746-OAP12 output module.
1746-F9
Modular Card Slot Fillers — Two fillers per package. Orders must be for multiples of two. (Price is per filler.)
1746-N2
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
11-4
Replacement Parts
Description
Catalog
Number
Connector — Mating Connector for 32-point user-made cable
1746-N3
Kit consisting of 4 replacement terminal covers and labels for 4, 8, 16 I/O modules
1746-R9
Replacement Covers and Labels — Two covers per package. Orders must be for multiples of two covers. (Price is per
cover.)
-
Catalog Number for 1746-P1.
1746-R10
Catalog Numbers for 1746-P2 and -P3 power supplies.
1746-R11
SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 Processors.
1746-R12
Specialty I/O.
1746-R13
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processor.
1746-R14
Catalog Number for 1747-ASB.
1746-R16
Replacement Fuse Holder for Catalog Number 1746-OAP12. Two fuse holders per package. Orders must be for
multiples of two. (Price is per holder.)
1746-R17
Replacement Retainer Clips — Four clips per package. Orders must be for multiples of four. (Price is per clip.)
1746-R15
Replacement Remote I/O Address Labels: Includes five labels for remote PLC system and five labels for remote SLC
system.
1746-RL35
Replacement Octal Label Kit — Kit includes one octal LED label and one door label.
-
for 1746-IA16.
1746-RL40
for 1746-IB16.
1746-RL41
for 1746-IG16.
1746-RL42
for 1746-IM16.
1746-RL43
for 1746-IN16.
1746-RL44
for 1746-IV16.
1746-RL45
for 1746-ITB16.
1746-RL46
for 1746-ITV16.
1746-RL47
for 1746-OA16.
1746-RL50
for 1746-OB16.
1746-RL51
for 1746-OG16.
1746-RL52
for 1746-OV16.
1746-RL53
for 1746-OW16.
1746-RL54
for 1746-OBP16.
1746-RL55
for 1746-OVP16.
1746-RL56
for 1746-OAP12.
1746-RL57
for 1746-IC16.
1746-RL58
for 1746-IH16.
1746-RL59
for 1746-IB32.
1746-RL60
for 1746-IV32.
1746-RL61
for 1746-OB32 and 1746-OB32E.
1746-RL70
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Replacement Parts
Description
11-5
Catalog
Number
for 1746-OV32.
1746-RL71
for 1746-OB16E.
1746-RL72
Lithium Battery Assembly. This is an optional part used for the SLC 500 Fixed and Modular Hardware Style processors
and the Hand-Held Terminal. Refer to product documentation for proper storage and handling instructions. For disposal
information, consult your nearest Rockwell Automation Sales Office.
1747-BA
Replacement Keys for the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors
1747-KY1
Replacement Parts Kit for 20 I/O Fixed Hardware Style Processor, consists of: two Output Terminal Covers, two Input
Terminal Covers, two Prom/Battery Covers, and one HHT/Comm Connector Cover.
1747-R5
Replacement Parts Kit for 30 & 40 I/O Fixed Hardware Style Processors, consists of: two Output Terminal Covers, two
Input Terminal Covers, two PROM/Battery Covers, and one HHT/Comm Connector Cover.
1747-R7
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
11-6
Replacement Parts
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Appendix
A
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
The information in this appendix will help you plan, install, and
operate the SLC 500 in a DH-485 network. This chapter also contains
information that describes the DH-485 network functions, network
architecture, and performance characteristics. It also covers:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DH-485 network description
DH-485 network protocol
DH-485 token rotation
DH-485 network initialization
devices that use the DH-485 network
1747-AIC isolated link coupler for DH-485
1747-UIC USB to DH-485 interface converter
example system configuration
(includes 1761-NET-AIC advanced interface converter)
• important planning considerations
• installing the DH-485 network
DH-485 Network
Description
The DH-485 network passes information between devices on the
plant floor. The network monitors process parameters, device
parameters, device status, process status and application programs to
support data acquisition, data monitoring, program upload/download
and supervisory control.
The DH-485 network offers:
•
•
•
•
interconnection of 32 devices
multi-master capability
token passing access control
the ability to add or remove nodes without disrupting the
network
• maximum network length of 1219 m (4000 ft)(1)
(1) The network can be extended to 2,438 meters (8,000 feet) by connecting two AIC+ Advanced Interface
Converters (1761-NET-AIC). Refer to the AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter User Manual, publication number
1761-6.4.
1
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
A-2
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
The following section describes the protocol used to control message
transfers on the DH-485 network. The protocol supports two classes
of devices: initiators and responders. All initiators on the network get
a chance to initiate message transfers. To determine which initiator
has the right to transmit, a token passing algorithm is used.
DH-485 Network Protocol
A node holding the token can send any valid packet onto the
network. Each node is allowed only one transmission (plus two
retries) each time it receives the token. After a node sends one
message packet, it attempts to give the token to its successor by
sending a “token pass” packet to its successor.
DH-485 Token Rotation
If no network activity occurs, the initiator sends the token pass packet
again. After two retries (a total of three tries) the initiator will attempt
to find a new successor.
IMPORTANT
The maximum address that the initiator will search
for before wrapping to zero is the value in the
configurable parameter “maximum node address.”
The default value for this parameter is 31 for all
initiators and responders.
The allowable range of the node address of a initiator is 0 to 31. The
allowable address range for all responders is 1 to 31. There must be at
least one initiator on the network.
DH-485 Network
Initialization
Network initialization begins when a period of inactivity exceeding
the time of a link dead timeout is detected by a initiator on the
network. When the time for a link dead timeout is exceeded, usually
the initiator with the lowest address claims the token. When a initiator
has the token it will begin to build the network. The network requires
at least one initiator to initialize it.
Building a network begins when the initiator that claimed the token
tries to pass the token to the successor node. If the attempt to pass the
token fails, or if the initiator has no established successor (for
example, when it powers up), it begins a linear search for a successor
starting with the node above it in the addressing.
When the initiator finds another active initiator, it passes the token to
that node, which repeats the process until the token is passed all the
way around the network to the first node. At this point, the network is
in a state of normal operation.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
Devices that Use the
DH-485 Network
A-3
Presently, the following SLC 500 devices support the DH-485 network:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SLC 500 Fixed I/O Controller (responder)
SLC 5/01 Modular I/O Controller (responder)
SLC 5/02 Modular I/O Controller (initiator/responder)
SLC 5/03 Modular I/O Controller (initiator/responder)
SLC 5/04 Modular I/O Controller (initiator/responder)
SLC 5/05 Modular I/O Controller (initiator/responder)
Personal computer running your programming software
(initiator)
• Hand-Held Terminal (initiator)
• DTAM (initiator/responder)
Other devices that use the DH-485 network include those in the table
below.
Catalog Number Description
Installation
Requirement
Function
Publication
1746-BAS
BASIC Module
SLC Chassis
Provides an interface for SLC 500 devices to third
party devices. Program in BASIC to interface the 3
channels (2 RS232 and 1 DH485) to printers,
modems, or the DH-485 network for data collection.
1746-UM004
1746-RM001
1746-PM001
1747-KE
DH-485/DF1
Interface Module
SLC Chassis
Provides a non-isolated DH-485 interface for
SLC 500 devices to host computers over RS-232
using full- or DF1 half-duplex protocol. Enables
remote programming using your programming
software to an SLC 500 processor or the DH-485
network through modems. Ideal for low cost
RTU/SCADA applications.
1747-6.12
1747-UIC
USB to DH-485
Interface Converter
Standalone
Provides connection to personal computer’s USB port
and features an RS-232 and an RS-485 port for
connection to SLC 500 controllers.
1747-IN063
1770-KF3
DH-485/DF1
Interface Module
Standalone
(“desktop”)
Provides an isolated DH-485 interface for SLC 500
devices to host computers over RS-232 using full- or
DF1 half-duplex protocol. Enables remote
programming using your programming software to
an SLC 500 processor or the DH-485 network
through modems.
1770-6.5.18
1785-KA5
DH+/DH485
Gateway
(1771) PLC
Chassis
Provides communication between stations on the
PLC-5 (DH+) and SLC 500 (DH-485) networks.
Enables communication and data transfer from PLC
to SLC 500 on DH-485 network. Also enables
programming software programming or data
acquisition across DH+ to DH-485.
1785-6.5.5
1785-1.21
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
A-4
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
Catalog Number Description
Installation
Requirement
Function
Publication
2760-RB
Flexible Interface
Module
(1771) PLC
Chassis
Provides an interface for SLC 500 (using protocol
cartridge 2760-SFC3) to other A-B PLCs and devices.
Three configurable channels are available to
interface with Bar Code, Vision, RF, Dataliner, and
PLC systems.
2760-ND001
1784-KTX, -KTXD
PC DH-485 Interface
Card
ISA Bus
Provides DH485 or DH+ connection
1784-6.5.22
1784-PCMK
PCMCIA Interface
Card
PCMCIA slot in
computer
Provides DH485 or DH+ connection
1784-6.5.19
2707-L8P1, -L8P2, DTAM Plus and
DTAM Micro
-L40P1, -L40P2,
Operator Interfaces
-V40P1, -V40P2,
-V40P2N,
-M232P3, and
-M485P3
Panel Mount
Provides electronic operator interface for SLC 500
processors.
2707-800,
2707-803
2711-K5A2,
PanelView 550 and
-B5A2, -K5A5,
PanelView 900
-B5A5, -K5A1,
Operator Terminals
-B5A1, -K9A2,
-T9A2, -K9A5,
-T9A5, -K9A1, and
-T9A1
Panel Mount
Provides electronic operator interface for SLC 500
processors.
2711-802, 2711-816
1784-PKTX,
-PKTXD
PCI Bus
Provides DH-485 or DH+ connection
1784-6.5.27
PC DH-485 Interface
Card
1747-AIC Isolated Link
Coupler for DH-485
The isolated link coupler (1747-AIC) is used to connect SLC 500 family
devices to the DH-485 network (as shown on page A-5). The coupler
provides a 6-position removable terminal block for connection to the
DH-485 communication cable.
Network connections for SLC 500 processors are provided by the
Catalog Number 1747-C11, 304.8 mm (12 in.) cable supplied with the
link coupler. Network connections for peripheral devices, such as the
Personal Interface Converter (1747-PIC), Data Table Access Module
(1747-DTAM-E), or Hand-Held Terminal (1747-PT1) are provided by
the standard Catalog Number 1747-C10 1.8 m (6 ft) cable supplied
with each of those devices. If you need to connect a peripheral device
that is between 1.8 m (6 ft) and 6.1 m (20 ft) away, use the 1747-C20
cable.
To protect connected devices, the coupler provides 1500V dc isolation
between the communications cable and the attached SLC 500
controller and peripheral devices (PIC, DTAM, or HHT).
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
A-5
The isolated link coupler can also be used to provide connectivity
between a peripheral device (programming software and PIC, HHT, or
DTAM) for distances greater than 1.8 m (6 ft) up to a maximum of
1219 m (4000 ft). Below is an example of a “remote” connection
between a computer running your programming software and an
SLC 500 processor.
Programming
Software
1747-PIC
PIC
1747-C10
1747-AIC
1747-AIC
>1.8m (6 ft)
+24V dc
1747-C20
1747-C11
Data Table
Access Module
1747-DTAM-E
1747-UIC USB to DH-485
Interface Converter
The 1747-UIC allows you to connect DH-485 devices directly to a
computer’s USB port. It features an RS-232 port for connection to
SLC 5/03 and higher processors, MicroLogix, PanelView 300 and
higher terminals, 1761-NET-AIC+, and Logix controllers, as well as an
RS-485 port for connection to SLC 5/03 and lower processors,
PanelView 300 and higher terminals, and 1747-AIC.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
A-6
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
PanelView 300 and SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, SLC 5/05
(Channel 0)
higher
Connecting to the RS-232 Port
PC with
USB Port
USB (DF1)
USB
OK
DH485
USB to DH485
INTERFACE CONVERTER
CAT
1747-UIC
C
SER
A
R
FRN
X.X
1747-UIC
US
LISTED IND. CONT. EQ. FOR HAZ.
LOC. A196,
CompactLogix
OPERATING TEMP CODE TAG
RS485 (DH485)
MADE IN INDIA
CLASS 1 GROUPS A, B, C, AND D, DIV. 2
SW
Mfg
XXXX
N223
RS232 (DH485)
AIC+
FlexLogix
ControlLogix
MicroLogix
Connect the following DH-485 equipment to
the RS-232 port
using cable
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 (Channel 0)
1747-CP3, 1756-CP3
1761-NET-AIC (AIC+)
Advanced Interface Converter
1747-CP3, 1756-CP3 (Port 1, 9-pin D)
1761-CBL-PM02 (Port 2, 8-pin DIN)
PanelView 300 and higher with
RS-232 (DH-485) port
2711-NC13
MicroLogix
PanelView 300 Micro (DH-485)
1761-CBL-PM02
CompactLogix
1747-CP3, 1756-CP3
FlexLogix
1747-CP3, 1756-CP3
ControlLogix
1747-CP3, 1756-CP3
Connecting to the RS-485 Port
SLC 500 Fixed Controller
PC with
USB Port
PanelView 300
and higher
USB (DF1)
USB
OK
DH485
USB to DH485
INTERFACE CONVERTER
CAT
1747-UIC
C
SER
A
R
FRN
X.X
US
LISTED IND. CONT. EQ. FOR HAZ.
LOC. A196,
OPERATING TEMP CODE TAG
CLASS 1 GROUPS A, B, C, AND D, DIV. 2
MADE IN INDIA
RS485 (DH485)
SW
Mfg
XXXX
N223
RS232 (DH485)
DH-485
Peripheral
CPU
Power
SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03
(Channel 1)
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
1747-AIC
1747-UIC
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
Connect the following DH-485 equipment to the RS-485 port
A-7
using cable
SLC 500 Fixed Controller
SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, and SLC 5/03 (Channel 1)
1747-C13
1747-AIC Isolated Link Coupler
PanelView 300 and higher with DH-485 port
Example System
Configuration
1747-C10
Below is an example of a DH-485 network.
Personal Computer
Personal Computer
SLC 5/03, 5/04, or 5/05
Modular Controller
1747-PIC or
1747-UIC
Interface
Converter
1761-NET-AIC
Advanced Interface
Converter
1747-AIC
Isolated
Link
Coupler
SLC 500 20-Point Fixed
Controller with 2-Slot
Expansion Chassis
DH-485 Network
max. length 1219m (4,000 ft)
1747-AIC
1747-AIC
1747-AIC
1747-AIC
Data Table
Access
Module
SLC 500 20-Point
Fixed Controller
SLC 5/01 Modular Controller
SLC 500
Hand-Held
SLC 500 Fixed Controller
Terminal
SLC 5/02 Modular Controller
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
A-8
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
Configuring the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Channel 0 for
DH485
The RS-232 port (channel 0) of the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
processor can be configured for DH485 protocol. Refer to your
programming software user manual for software configuration
information.
You can connect channel 0 of the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
processors to a DH485 network using the 1747-CP3 cable and a
1761-NET-AIC Advanced Interface Converter (AIC+). In this case, the
AIC+ must be powered with 24V dc. The 1746-P1, -P2, -P4, -P5, and
-P6 power supplies provide 24V dc user power which may be used to
power the AIC+.
SLC 5/01
SLC 5/03 or 5/04
1747-AIC
24V dc Power
Supply
DH-485
1747-C11
1747-CP3
1761-NET-AIC
RS-232
DH-485
24V dc User Power
Connection
Personal Computer
APS
1761-NET-AIC
1747-CP3
24V dc User Power Connection
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
Important Planning
Considerations
A-9
Carefully plan your network configuration before installing any
hardware. Listed below are some of the factors that can affect system
performance:
• amount of electrical noise, temperature, and humidity in the
network environment
• number of devices on the network
• connection and grounding quality in installation
• amount of communication traffic on the network
• type of process being controlled
• network configuration
The major hardware and software issues you need to resolve before
installing a network are discussed in the following sections.
Hardware Considerations
You need to decide the length of the communication cable, where
you will route it, and how to protect it from the environment where it
will be installed.
When the communication cable is installed, you need to know how
many devices are to be connected during installation and how many
devices will be added in the future. The following sections will help
you understand and plan the network.
Number of Devices and Length of Communication Cable
You must install a link coupler (1747-AIC) for each node on the
network. If you plan to add nodes later, provide additional link
couplers during the initial installation to avoid recabling after the
network is in operation.
The maximum length of the communication cable is 1219m (4000 ft).
This is the total cable distance from the first node to the last node on
the network.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
A-10
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
Planning Cable Routes
Follow these guidelines to help protect the communication cable from
electrical interference:
• Keep the communication cable at least 1.52 m (5 ft) from any
electric motors, transformers, rectifiers, generators, arc welders,
induction furnaces, or sources of microwave radiation.
• If you must run the cable across power feed lines, run the cable
at right angles to the lines.
• If you do not run the cable through a contiguous metallic
wireway or conduit, keep the communication cable at least
0.15 m (6 in.) from ac power lines of less than 20A, 0.30 m (1 ft)
from lines greater than 20A, but only up to 100k VA, and 0.60 m
(2 ft) from lines of 100k VA or more.
• If you run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or
conduit, keep the communication cable at least 0.08 m (3 in.)
from ac power lines of less than 20A, 0.15 m (6 in.) from lines
greater than 20A, but only up to 100k VA, and 0.30 m (1 ft) from
lines of 100k VA or more.
Running the communication cable through conduit provides
extra protection from physical damage and electrical
interference. If you route the cable through conduit, follow
these additional recommendations:
– Use ferromagnetic conduit near critical sources of electrical
interference. You can use aluminum conduit in non-critical
areas.
– Use plastic connectors to couple between aluminum and
ferromagnetic conduit. Make an electrical connection around
the plastic connector (use pipe clamps and the heavy gauge
wire or wire braid) to hold both sections at the same
potential.
– Ground the entire length of conduit by attaching it to the
building earth ground.
– Do not let the conduit touch the plug on the cable.
– Arrange the cables loosely within the conduit. The conduit
should contain only serial communication cables.
– Install the conduit so that it meets all applicable codes and
environmental specifications.
For more information on planning cable routes, see Industrial
Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, Publication Number
1770-4.1.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
A-11
Software Considerations
Software considerations include the configuration of the network and
the parameters that can be set to the specific requirements of the
network. The following are major configuration factors that have a
significant effect on network performance:
•
•
•
•
•
•
number of nodes on the network
addresses of those nodes
baud rate
maximum node address selection
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 only: token hold factor
maximum number of communicating devices
The following sections explain network considerations and describe
ways to select parameters for optimum network performance (speed).
Number of Nodes
The number of nodes on the network directly affects the data transfer
time between nodes. Unnecessary nodes (such as a second
programming terminal that is not being used) slow the data transfer
rate. The maximum number of nodes on the network is 32.
Setting Node Addresses
The best network performance occurs when node addresses start at 0
and are assigned in sequential order. SLC 500 processors default to
node address 1. The node address is stored in the processor status file
(S:15L). Processors cannot be node 0. Also, initiators such as personal
computers should be assigned the lowest numbered addresses to
minimize the time required to initialize the network.
Setting Processor Baud Rate
The best network performance occurs at the highest baud rate. All
devices must be at the same baud rate. The baud rate is stored in the
processor status file (S:15H).
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
A-12
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
Maximum Node Address Setting
The maximum node address parameter should be set as low as
possible. This minimizes the amount of time used in soliciting
successors when initializing the network. If all nodes are addressed in
sequence from 0, and the maximum node address is equal to the
address of the highest addressed node, the token rotation will
improve by the amount of time required to transmit a solicit successor
packet plus the slot timeout value.
Note that this does not allow any node to be added to the network
without affecting the response time. On the other hand, since the time
required to hold an open station address is greater than the time
required to pass a token, it can be useful to leave a temporary device
(such as a personal computer) connected if there is only one such
device. (A solicit successor packet requires the same transmission time
as the token pass, but there is an added slot timeout period.)
See your programming software user manual or the Hand-Held
Terminal User Manual, Catalog Number 1747-NP002, for the
procedures to set node addresses, processor baud rate, and maximum
node addresses.
IMPORTANT
The SLC 500 Series A (only) processors set the
maximum node address to 31 when power is cycled
increasing initialization and response time of the
network.
Maximum Number of Communicating Devices
SLC 500 fixed and SLC 5/01 processors can be selected by two
initiators maximum at the same time. Using more than two initiators to
select the same SLC 500 fixed and SLC 5/01 processors at the same
time can cause communication timeouts.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
Installing the DH-485
Network
A-13
To install a DH-485 network, you will need tools to strip the shielded
cable and to attach the cable and terminators to the Isolated Link
Coupler.
Install the DH-485 network using the following tools (or equivalent):
Description
Part Number
Manufacturer
Shielded Twisted Pair Cable
Belden #3106A or #9842
Belden
Stripping Tool
45-164
Ideal Industries
1/8 in. Slotted Screwdriver
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
DH-485 Communication Cable and Isolated Link Coupler
The link coupler provides a connection for each node. The isolated
link coupler electrically isolates the DH-485 communication interface
from the processor and peripheral connections. Electrical-optical
isolation is provided to 1500V.
The suggested DH-485 communication cable is Belden #3106A or
#9842 cable. The cable is jacketed and shielded with two twisted wire
pairs and a drain wire.
One pair provides a balanced signal line, and one wire of the other
pair is used for a common reference line between all nodes on the
network. The shield reduces the effect of electrostatic noise from the
industrial environment on the network communication.
Installing the DH-485 Communication Cable
The communication cable consists of a number of cable segments
daisy-chained together. The total length of the cable segments cannot
exceed 1219m (4000 ft).
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
A-14
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
When cutting cable segments, make them long enough to route them
from one link coupler to the next with sufficient slack to prevent
strain on the connector. Allow enough extra cable to prevent chafing
and kinking in the cable.
Belden #3106A or #9842
Link Coupler
1747-AIC
Link Coupler
1747-AIC
DH-485
Belden #3106A or #9842
Belden #3106A or #9842
Link Coupler
1747-AIC
DH-485
DH-485
Connector
Connector
Connector
Peripheral
Peripheral
Peripheral
CPU
CPU
CPU
Power
Power
IMPORTANT
Power
A daisy-chained network is recommended as shown
above. We do not recommend the following:
Belden #3106A or #9842
Connector
Belden #3106A or #9842
Connector
Belden #3106A or #9842
Connector
Incorrect
Connecting the Communication Cable to the Isolated Link Coupler
Attach the terminal block of the link coupler to the Belden #3106A or
#9842 cable as shown below. Additional terminal blocks are available
for replacement, see Chapter 11.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
A-15
Single Cable Connection
Orange with White Stripes
Belden #3106A or #9842
6
5
4
3
2
1
White with Orange Stripes
Shrink Tubing
Recommended
Blue (#3106A) or Blue with
White Stripes (#9842)
Drain Wire
Termination
A
B
Common
Shield
Chassis
Ground
Multiple Cable Connection
to Previous Device
to Successive Device
The table below shows wire/terminal connections for DH-485
connectors for Belden #3106A.
For this Wire/Pair
Connect this Wire
To this Terminal
Shield/Drain
Non-jacketed
Terminal 2 - Shield
Blue
Blue
Terminal 3 - (Common)
White/Orange
White with Orange Stripe
Terminal 4 - (Data B)
Orange with White Stripe
Terminal 5 - (Data A)
The table below shows wire/terminal connections for DH-485
connectors for Belden #9842.
For this Wire/Pair
Connect this Wire
To this Terminal
Shield/Drain
Non-jacketed
Terminal 2 - Shield
Blue/White
White with Blue Stripe
Cut back - no connection(1)
White/Orange
Blue with White Stripe
Terminal 3 - (Common)
White with Orange Stripe
Terminal 4 - (Data B)
Orange with White Stripe
Terminal 5 - (Data A)
(1) To prevent confusion when installing the communication cable, cut back the white with blue stripe wire
immediately after the insulation jacket is removed. This wire is not used by DH-485.
IMPORTANT
In Series A 1747-AIC, terminal 5 was called DATA B
and terminal 4 was called DATA A. In this case, use
terminal numbers only and ignore signal names DATA
B and DATA A. The internal circuitry of the Series A is
the same as Series B.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
A-16
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
Grounding and Terminating the DH-485 Network
Only one of the link couplers at the end of the link must have
Terminals 1 and 2 of the network connector jumpered together. This
provides an earth ground connection for the shield of the
communication cable.
Link couplers at both ends of the network must have Terminals 5 and
6 of the link connectors jumpered together. This connects the
termination impedance (of 120Ω) that is built into each link coupler as
required by the DH-485 specification. See the figure below for the
proper jumpering.
End-of-Line Termination
Jumper
Jumper
6
5
6
5
4
Belden #9842 Cable
1219m (4,000 ft) maximum length
3
4
3
2
2
1
1
Jumper
Powering the Link Coupler
In normal operation with the programmable controller connected to
the link coupler, the processor powers both the link coupler and
peripheral device (DTAM, PIC, HHT) — if connected — through the
C11 cable.
If you do not connect the processor to the link coupler, then use a
24V dc power supply to power the link coupler and peripheral
device. The 1747-AIC requires 85 mA at 24V dc. With a peripheral
device connected, the total current required is 190 mA at 24V dc.
If both the processor and external power are connected to the link
coupler, only the external source is used.
IMPORTANT
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Always connect the CHS GND (chassis ground)
terminal to the nearest earth ground. This connection
must be made whether or not an external 24V dc
supply is used.
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
A-17
Below are three options for externally powering the 1747-AIC:
• If the link coupler is to be installed in an office environment,
you can use the wall mount power supply (1747-NP1) or global
desktop power supply (1747-NP2). The link coupler would be
powered through either the 1747-C10 cable or by hardwiring
from the supply to the screw terminals on the link coupler.
• If you use any of the following chassis power supplies (1746-P1,
1746-P2, 1746-P4, 1746-P5, and 1746-P6), you can use the 24V
dc user power supply (200 mA maximum) built into the power
supply. The link coupler would be powered through a
hard-wired connection from the screw terminals on the power
supply to the screw terminals on the bottom of the link coupler.
• You can use an external DC power supply with the following
specifications:
– operating voltage: 24V dc + 25%
– output current: 190 mA
– rated NEC
The link coupler would be powered through a hard-wired
connection from the external supply to the screw terminals on
the bottom of the link coupler.
ATTENTION
!
If you use an external power supply, it must be
24V dc. Permanent damage will result if miswired
with wrong power source.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
A-18
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
The figure below shows the external wiring connections and
specifications of the link coupler.
SLC 500
DH-485 LINK COUPLER
CAT
SER
LISTED IND. CONT. EQ.
FOR HAZ. LOC. A196
OPERATING
TEMPERATURE
CODE T3C
CLASS 1, GROUPS A, B, C AND D, DIV. 2
6
5
4
3
2
1
Left Side View
EXTERNAL POWER REQUIREMENTS
24 VDC ± 25% A T 190 mA
N.E.C. CLASS 2
TERMINATION
A
B
COMMON
SHIELD
CHASSIS GROUND
CAUTION EXTERNAL POWER, IF USED, MUST BE 24VDC
PERMANENT DAMAGE TO CIRCUITRY WILL RESULT
IF MISWIRED WITH THE WRONG POWER SOURCE.
MADE IN U.S.A.
CHS
GND
Bottom View
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
24VDC
DC
NEUT
CHS
GND
FAC 1P
DC
NEUT
24V dc
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
A-19
You can connect an unpowered link coupler to the DH-485 network
without disrupting network activity. In addition, if an SLC 500
controller powers a link coupler that is connected to the DH-485
network, network activity will not be disrupted should the SLC 500
controller be removed from the link coupler.
Installing and Attaching the Link Couplers
1. When installing the link coupler in an enclosure, use care so that
the cable connecting the SLC 500 controller to the link coupler
does not hit the enclosure door.
2. Carefully plug the terminal block into the DH-485 port on the
link coupler you are putting on the network. Allow enough
cable slack to prevent stress on the plug.
3. Provide strain relief for the cable after it is wired to the terminal
block. This guards against breakage of the Belden cable wires.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
A-20
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Appendix
B
RS-232 Communication Interface
This appendix provides an overview of the RS-232 communication
interface and explains how the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
processors support it. This appendix also provides information on the
following:
• RS-232 and SCADA applications
• RS-232 communication interface overview
• SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors and RS-232
communication
• SLC 500 devices that support RS-232 communication
• DF1 protocol and the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
processors
• ASCII communication
• DF1 communication protocol modems overview
• wiring connectors for RS-232 communication
• applications for the RS-232 communication interface
For online configuration procedures of the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and
SLC 5/05 processors for DF1 protocol, see your programming software
user manual.
RS-232 and SCADA
Applications
RS-232 is a communication interface included under SCADA
(Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) applications. SCADA is a
term that refers to control applications that require communication
over long distances. For more information about the use of
Allen-Bradley equipment in SCADA applications, refer to the SCADA
System Applications Guide, publication number AG-6.5.8, and the
SCADA System Selection Guide, publication number AG-2.1.
RS-232 Communication
Interface Overview
RS-232 is an Electronics Industries Association (EIA) standard that
specifies the electrical, mechanical, and functional characteristics for
serial binary communication.
One of the benefits of RS-232 communication is that it lets you
integrate telephone and radio modems into your control system. The
distance over which you are able to communicate with certain system
devices is virtually limitless.
1
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
B-2
RS-232 Communication Interface
The RS-232 channel on the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
processors supports four protocols:
•
•
•
•
Full-Duplex DF1 (default)
Half-Duplex DF1 (SCADA)
DH-485
ASCII Communications
The SLC and PLC products detailed in this appendix that communicate
over the RS-232 communication interface also use the DF1 serial
communication protocol. DF1 protocol delimits messages, controls
message flow, detects and signals errors, and retries after errors are
detected.
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC
5/05 processors and RS-232
Communication
The SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors can communicate by
means of the RS-232 communication port, channel 0. Channel 0
supports DF1 full-duplex protocol and DF1 half-duplex master and
slave protocol, DH485 protocol, as well as ASCII communications.
Refer to your programming software user manual for information on
configuring the RS-232 communication port, channel 0.
The details of the DF1 protocols can be found in the DF1 Protocol and
Command Set Reference Manual, Publication Number 1770-6.5.16.
Channel 0 provides a minimum of 500V dc isolation between the I/O
signals and the logic ground of the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
processors. The channel is a 9-pin D-shell. The table below provides a
description of each of the pins.
Pin
Pin Name
1
DCD (Data Carrier Detect)
2
RXD (Receive Data)
3
TXD (Transmit Data)
4
DTR (Data Terminal Ready)
5
COM (Common Return [Signal Ground])
6
DSR (Data Set Ready)
7
RTS (Request to Send)
8
CTS (Clear to Send)
9
NC (No Connection)
The D-shell is the bottom port on the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and
SLC 5/05 processors.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
RS-232 Communication Interface
SLC 500 Devices that
Support RS-232
Communication
B-3
The SLC 500 product line has three other modules, aside from the
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors, that support the RS-232
communication interface. They are the DH-485 Communication
Interface (1770-KF3), the BASIC module (1746-BAS), and the
DH-485/RS-232C Interface (1747-KE). All three of these modules can
be used with either the SLC 5/01 or SLC 5/02 processor.
1770-KF3 Module
The 1770-KF3 module links host computers with the Allen-Bradley
DH-485 Data Highway. The host computer communicates with the
1770-KF3 over an RS232 link using DF1 protocol. Through the
1770-KF3, the host computer can communicate with the nodes on the
DH-485 network.
For more information on the 1770-KF3 module, see the DH-485
Communication Interface User Manual, Catalog Number 1770-6.5.18.
1747-KE Module
The 1747-KE is a communication interface module that acts as a
bridge between DH-485 networks and devices requiring DF1 protocol.
You can configure the DF1 port on the 1747-KE for RS-232/423,
RS-422, or RS-485 devices. Residing in an SLC 500 chassis, the 1747-KE
is ideally used as an interface module, linking remote DH-485
networks via a modem to a central host.
For more information on the 1747-KE module, see the DH-485/RS-232
Interface Module User Manual, Catalog Number 1747-6.12.
1746-BAS and 1746-BAS-T Modules
The 1746-BAS and 1746-BAS-T modules, which are programmed using
the BASIC language, have two configurable serial ports for interfacing
to computers, modems, serial printers, and other RS-232 compatible
devices. You can also use them for off-loading complex math routines
from an SLC 500 processor, thereby conserving ladder logic memory.
For more information on the 1746-BAS module, see the SLC 500
BASIC and BASIC-T Module User Manual, Catalog Number
1746-UM004.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
B-4
RS-232 Communication Interface
DF1 Protocol and the SLC
5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
Processors
DF1 protocol combines data transparency (ANSI — American National
Standards Institute — specification subcategory D1) and 2-way
simultaneous transmission with embedded responses (F1). It is also a
peer-to-peer, link-layer protocol. This means that system devices have
equal access to messages being sent over the RS-232 communication
interface.
DF1 protocol provides two modes of communication: full- and
half-duplex.
DF1 Full-Duplex Protocol
DF1 full-duplex protocol (also referred to as DF1 point-to-point
protocol) lets you use RS-232 point-to-point communication in
applications that require it. This type of protocol supports
simultaneous transmissions between two devices in both directions.
You can use channel 0 as a programming port, or as a peer-to-peer
port using the MSG instruction.
In full-duplex mode, the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors
can send and receive messages. When the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and
SLC 5/05 processors receive messages, they act as an end device, or
final destination for the data packets(1). The processor ignores the
destination and source addresses received in the data packets.
However, the processor swaps these addresses in the reply that it
transmits in response to any command data packet that it has
received.
By setting a parameter with your programming software, you can also
make the processor verify that the host computer can receive
embedded responses. To do this, the processor waits to receive an
embedded response from the host computer, before sending one of its
own. A host computer that can send embedded responses should also
be able to receive them.
If you use modems with DF1 full-duplex protocol, make sure that they
are capable of simultaneous bi-directional communication. Typically,
dial-up modems designed to be connected to standard telephone lines
can support full-duplex.
(1) The exceptions to this are SLC 5/04 and SLC 5/05 processors that have the DH+ to DF1 or Ethernet to DF1
full-duplex passthru bit enabled. In the case of the SLC 5/04, the processor checks the destination address in
the packet and if it does not match the configured DH+ address of the processor, the packet is forwarded onto
the DH+ network to the destination address DH+ node. In the case of the SLC 5/05, the processor checks the
destination address in the packet. If the routing table exists and an IP address is in the routing table for that
DF1 address, the packet is forwarded out to the Ethernet network to that IP address.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
RS-232 Communication Interface
B-5
Full-Duplex (Point-to-Point)
Modem
Modem
SLC 5/03
(1747-L532)
SLC 5/03
(1747-L532)
1747-CP3
DF1 Half-Duplex Protocol
DF1 half-duplex protocol provides a multi-drop single master/multiple
slave network. In contrast to the DF1 full-duplex protocol,
communication takes place in one direction at a time. You can use
channel 0 as a programming port, or as a peer-to-peer port using the
MSG instruction.
In half-duplex mode, the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors
can be either master or slave devices. As a master device, the
processor polls each slave on the network on a regular and sequential
basis. The master also supports routing of data packets from one slave
to another, or slave-to-slave communication. As a slave device, the
processor can send data packets when polled by the master device,
which initiates all communication with slave devices.
If the master device has no data to send, it can still receive data from
the slave device. To do this, the master sends out a poll packet
addressed to the slave. If the slave has data to send, it does so in
response to the poll packet. Otherwise, the slave sends a simple
two-byte response, so that the master knows that it is active.
Several Allen-Bradley products support half-duplex master protocol.
They include the Enhanced PLC-5 processors, and SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04,
and SLC 5/05 processors. WINtelligent Linx and RSLinx (2.0 or higher)
from Rockwell Software, Inc. also support half-duplex master
protocol.
DF1 Half-duplex supports up to 255 slave devices (addresses 0 to 254)
with address 255 reserved for master broadcasts. The SLC 5/03,
SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 support broadcast reception. SLC 5/03,
SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors with operating system FRN C/6 can
also initiate broadcast write commands via the MSG instruction for all
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
B-6
RS-232 Communication Interface
channel 0 system mode drivers and for channel 1 (DH-485) on the
SLC 5/03 processor.
Broadcast is not supported for read commands or
any remote messages. Broadcast is also not
supported by the SLC 5/04 channel 1 DH+ network
or the SLC 5/05 channel 1 Ethernet network.
TIP
Either half-duplex or full-duplex modem types can be used for the
master, but half-duplex modems must be used for the slaves
(assuming there is more than one on a multi-drop network).
Personal Computer
Running RSLinx with DF1
Half-Duplex Protocol
(Master)
RS-232 (DF1 Protocol)
Modem
Modem
Modular Controller with SLC
5/02 Processor and 1747-KE
Interface Module (Slave)
Modem
Modular Controller with
SLC 5/03 Processor (Slave)
Modem
Modular Controller with SLC
5/01 Processor and 1747-KE
Interface Module (Slave)
Modem
Fixed Controller with 1747-KE
Interface Module (Slave)
Modular Controller with
SLC 5/03 Processor
(Master)
RS-232 (DF1 Protocol)
Modem
Modular Controller with SLC
5/02 Processor and 1747-KE
Interface Module (Slave)
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Modem
Modular Controller with
SLC 5/03 Processor (Slave)
Modem
Modem
Modular Controller with SLC
5/01 Processor and 1747-KE
Interface Module (Slave)
Modem
Fixed Controller with 1747-KE
Interface Module (Slave)
RS-232 Communication Interface
B-7
DF1 Radio Modem Channel 0 Driver
Series C FRN 6 (FRN C/6) and higher versions of operating systems
OS302 (SLC 5/03), OS401 (SLC 5/04) and OS501 (SLC 5/05) include a
channel 0 system mode driver called DF1 Radio Modem. This driver
implements a protocol, optimized for use with radio modem
networks, that is a hybrid between DF1 Full-Duplex protocol and DF1
Half-Duplex protocol, and therefore is not compatible with either of
these protocols.
IMPORTANT
The DF1 Radio Modem driver should only be used
among devices that support and are configured for
the DF1 Radio Modem protocol. Only SLC 5/03, 5/04
and 5/05 processors with operating systems FRN C/6
support DF1 Radio Modem protocol.
IMPORTANT
There are some radio modem network
configurations that will not work with the DF1 Radio
Modem driver. (See DF1 Radio Modem System
Limitations on page B-9.) In these configurations,
continue to use DF1 Half-Duplex protocol.
Like DF1 Full-Duplex protocol, DF1 Radio Modem allows any node to
initiate to any other node at any time (if the radio modem network
supports full-duplex data port buffering and radio transmission
collision avoidance). Like DF1 Half-Duplex protocol, a node ignores
any packets received that have a destination address other than its
own, with the exception of broadcast packets and passthru packets.
Unlike either DF1 Full-Duplex or DF1 Half-Duplex protocols, DF1
Radio Modem protocol does not include ACKs, NAKs, ENQs, or poll
packets. Data integrity is ensured by the CRC checksum.
Using the DF1 Radio Modem
The DF1 Radio Modem driver can be configured as the system mode
driver for channel 0 using RSLogix 500 version 5.50 or higher.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
B-8
RS-232 Communication Interface
The channel 0 configuration appears as follows:
The Baud, Parity, Stop Bits and Error Detection selections are identical
to the other DF1 drivers. Valid Node Addresses are 0 to 254, just like
the DF1 half-duplex drivers.
The primary advantage of using DF1 Radio Modem protocol for radio
modem networks is in transmission efficiency. Each read/write
transaction (command and reply) requires only one transmission by
the initiator (to send the command) and one transmission by the
responder (to return the reply). This minimizes the number of times
the radios need to “key-up” to transmit, which maximizes radio life
and minimizes radio power consumption. In contrast, DF1
Half-Duplex protocol requires five transmissions for the DF1 Master to
complete a read/write transaction with a DF1 Slave – three by the
master and two by the slave.
The DF1 Radio Modem driver can be used in a “pseudo” Master/Slave
mode with any radio modems, as long as the designated “Master”
node is the only node initiating MSG instructions, and as long as only
one MSG instruction is triggered at a time.
For modern serial radio modems that support full-duplex data port
buffering and radio transmission collision avoidance, the DF1 Radio
Modem driver can be used to set up a “masterless” peer-to-peer radio
network, where any node can initiate communications to any other
node at any time, as long as all of the nodes are within radio range so
that they receive each other’s transmissions.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
RS-232 Communication Interface
B-9
DF1 Radio Modem System Limitations
The following questions need to be answered in order to determine if
you can implement the new DF1 Radio Modem driver in your radio
modem network:
1. Are all of the devices SLC 5/03, 5/04 or 5/05 processors?
If so, then they must all be at operating system FRN C/6 or
higher in order to be configured with the DF1 Radio Modem
driver using RSLogix 500 version 5.50 or higher. If not, then
make sure that all of the nodes can support the DF1 Radio
Modem protocol. Once channel 0 is configured for DF1 Radio
Modem, you will need to use channel 1 to locally monitor and
program your SLC processor using RSLogix 500.
2. Does each node receive the radio transmissions of every other
node, being both within radio transmission/reception range and
on a common receiving frequency (either via a “Simplex” radio
mode or via a single, common, full-duplex repeater)?
If so, then go to question #3 to see if you can use the DF1 Radio
Modem driver to set up a peer-to-peer radio network. If not,
then you may still be able to use the DF1 Radio Modem driver,
but only if you limit MSG instruction initiation to the node
connected to the “master” radio modem whose transmissions
can be received by every other radio modem in the network.
3. Do the radio modems handle full-duplex data port buffering and
radio transmission collision avoidance?
If so, and the answer to #2 is yes as well, then you can take full
advantage of the peer-to-peer message initiation capability in
every node (i.e., the ladder logic in any node can trigger a MSG
instruction to any other node at any time). If not, then you may
still be able to use the DF1 Radio Modem driver, but only if you
limit MSG instruction initiation to a single “master” node whose
transmission can be received by every other node.
4. Can I take advantage of the SLC 5/04 and 5/05
channel-to-channel passthru to remotely program the other SLC
nodes using RSLinx and RSLogix 500 running on a PC connected
to a local SLC processor via DH+ or Ethernet?
Yes, with certain limitations imposed based on the radio modem
network.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
B-10
RS-232 Communication Interface
ASCII Communication
ASCII protocol allows you to connect the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and
SLC 5/05 processors to serial printers, PCs, and other third party
devices. ASCII protocol allows your ladder program to manage ASCII
data.
Modular Controller with
SLC 5/03 Processor
RS-232 Channel 0
1747-CP3
DF1 Communication
Protocol Modems Overview
You can connect the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors to
several different types of modems. In all cases, the processors act as
Data Terminal Equipment (DTE). DTE send and/or receive data on a
network. Modem or line drivers act as Data Communication
Equipment (DCE), which provide the signal conversion and coding
required for communication between DTE and data circuits. Other
DCE include phone-line modems and specialized modems, such as
radio and satellite-link modems.
In addition to Common Return (COM), Receive Data (RXD), and
Transmit Data (TXD), the following active modem-control lines are
provided on the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors:
RTS (Request to Send) — this output signal indicates to the modem
or other DCE that the DTE wants to transmit.
CTS (Clear to Send) — this input signal from the modem indicates
the modem is ready to receive the transmission by the DTE for
forwarding over a link.
DSR (Data Set Ready) — this input signal indicates the DCE device is
ready for operation. Loss of this signal causes a “modem-lost”
condition in the processor.
DTR (Data Terminal Ready) — this output signal from the DTE
indicates that it is ready for operation. You can also use this signal
with the processor to initiate DTR dialing in dial-up modems that
support such a feature.
DCD (Data Carrier Detect) — this is an input signal from the DCE
that indicates a carrier signal is being received and that presumably
data is to be received for forwarding to the DTE connected.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
RS-232 Communication Interface
Wiring Connectors for
RS-232 Communication
B-11
To connect Allen-Bradley devices with other devices over RS-232, you
must wire the cable connectors so that communication can occur
through the cabling, which provide the interface between devices.
Types of RS-232 Connectors
The figures below show male connectors, and their pinout locations,
for Allen-Bradley devices.
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
9-Pin Connector (Male)
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
15-Pin Connector (Male)
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
25-Pin Connector (Male)
DTE Pinout
Channel 0 is configured as DTE for all SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and
SLC 5/05 processors. The pinouts are the same as the 9-pin PC port.
DTE 9 Pinout
Signal is Equivalent
Equivalent
DTE 15 Pinout DTE 25 Pinout
Pin
Description
1
DCD Data Carrier Detect
Input
8
8
2
RXD Received Data
Input
3
3
3
TXD Transmitted Data
Output
2
2
4
DTR Data Terminal Ready
Output
11
20
5
COM Common Return (Signal
Ground)
Shared
7
7
6
DSR Data Set Ready
Input
6
6
7
RTS Request to Send
Output
4
4
8
CTS Clear to Send
Input
5
5
9
NC No Connection
Input
22 (RI Ring
Indicator)
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
B-12
RS-232 Communication Interface
DCE Pinout
Devices such as a modem are DCE. The pinouts on these terminals
are wired to interface with DTE.
DCE 9 Pinout
Signal is
Equivalent DCE 25
Pinout
Pin
Description
1
DCD Data Carrier Detect
Input
8
2
RXD Received Data
Input
3
3
TXD Transmitted Data
Output
2
4
DTR Data Terminal Ready
Output
20
5
COM Common Return (Signal Ground)
Shared
7
6
DSR Data Set Ready
Input
6
7
RTS Request to Send
Output
4
8
CTS Clear to Send
Input
5
9
RI Ring Indicator
Input
22
IMPORTANT
DCE signal names are viewed from a DTE
perspective. For example, TXD is a DTE output and
also a DCE input.
Pin Assignments for Wiring Connectors
Use the following pin assignments to wire the connectors of
Allen-Bradley control devices with modems and peripheral devices
that support RS-232 communication. See the table below to find the
wiring diagram that you need.
To Connect this
Device
To this Device
Remarks
See this
Page
Personal Computer
Modem
Hardware Handshaking Enabled
B-13
Peripheral DTE
Hardware Handshaking Disabled
B-13
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, Modem
Hardware Handshaking Enabled
and SLC 5/05
Peripheral DTE
Hardware Handshaking Disabled
Processors
Personal Computer Using a 1747-CP3 Cable
B-14
1747-KE
1746-BAS
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
B-14
B-15
Modem
Hardware Handshaking Enabled
B-15
Peripheral DTE
Hardware Handshaking Disabled
B-15
Modem
Hardware Handshaking Enabled
B-16
Peripheral DTE
Hardware Handshaking Disabled
B-16
RS-232 Communication Interface
B-13
To Connect this
Device
To this Device
Remarks
See this
Page
1770-KF3
Modem
Hardware Handshaking Enabled
B-17
2760-RB
Modem
Hardware Handshaking Enabled
B-17
Peripheral DTE
Hardware Handshaking Disabled
B-17
Modem
Hardware Handshaking Enabled
B-18
Peripheral DTE
Hardware Handshaking Disabled
B-18
PLC-5 (Channel 0)
Personal Computer to a Modem (Hardware Handshaking Enabled)
Modem 9-Pin
25-Pin
25-Pin
9-Pin
PC
GND
8
1
DCD
DCD
1
8
(1)
1
3
2
RXD
RXD
2
3
2
3
TXD
TXD
3
2
20
4
DTR
DTR
4
20
7
5
COM
COM
5
7
6
6
DSR
DSR
6
6
4
7
RTS
RTS
7
4
5
8
CTS
CTS
8
5
22
9
RI
RI
9
22
DTE
DCE
(1) Connect to the shield of the cable.
Personal Computer to SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 Processor, 1770-KF3,
or PLC-5 (Hardware Handshaking Disabled) (1)
Modem
(2)
(2)
9-Pin
25-Pin
DCD
1
8
RXD
RXD
3
2
3
TXD
TXD
2
3
4
DTR
DTR
4
20
7
5
COM
COM
5
7
6
6
DSR
DSR
6
6
4
7
RTS
RTS
7
4
5
8
CTS
CTS
8
5
9
RI
25-Pin
9-Pin
PC
GND
8
1
DCD
3
2
2
20
22
DTE
(3)
1
(2)
(2)
DCE
(1) You can also use cable 1747-CP3.
(2) Jumpers are only needed if you cannot disable the hardware handshaking on the port.
(3) Connect to the shield of the cable.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
B-14
RS-232 Communication Interface
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 Processor Connected to a Modem
(Hardware Handshaking Enabled)
SLC
5/03
Modem
9-Pin
9-Pin
25-Pin
1
DCD
DCD
1
8
2
RXD
RXD
2
3
3
TXD
TXD
3
2
4
DTR
DTR
4
20
5
COM
COM
5
7
6
DSR
DSR
6
6
7
RTS
RTS
7
4
8
CTS
CTS
8
5
9
NC
RI
9
22
GND (1)
DTE
1
DCE
(1) Connect to the shield of the cable.
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 Processor to another SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or
SLC 5/05, Personal Computer, 1770-KF3, or PLC-5 (Hardware Handshaking
Disabled) (1)
(2)
(2)
Peripheral
9-Pin
Device
25-Pin
9-Pin
SLC
5/03
1
DCD
DCD
1
8
2
TXD
TXD
3
2
3
RXD
RXD
2
3
4
DTR
DTR
4
20
5
COM
COM
5
7
6
DSR
DSR
6
6
7
RTS
RTS
7
4
8
CTS
CTS
8
5
9
NC
DTE
GND
(3)
1
DCE
(1) You can also use cable 1747-CP3.
(2) Jumpers are only needed if you cannot disable the hardware handshaking on the port.
(3) Connect to the shield of the cable.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
(2)
(2)
RS-232 Communication Interface
B-15
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 Processor Connected to a Personal
Computer with a 1747-CP3 Cable
9-Pin SLC 5/03
PC
9-Pin
1
DCD
DCD
1
2
RXD
TXD
3
3
TXD
RXD
2
4
DTR
DSR
6
5
COM
COM
5
6
DSR
DTR
4
7
RTS
CTS
8
8
CTS
RTS
7
9
DCE
NC
DTE
1747-KE to a Modem (Hardware Handshaking Enabled)
Peripheral
Device
9-Pin 1747-KE
GND
9-Pin
25-Pin
(1)
1
1
NC
DSR
6
6
2
RXD
RXD
2
3
3
TXD
TXD
3
2
4
DTR
DTR
4
20
5
COM
COM
5
7
6
DSR
DCR
1
8
7
RTS
RTS
7
4
8
CTS
CTS
8
5
9
NC
RI
9
22
DTE
DCE
(1) Connect to the shield of the cable.
1747-KE to a SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 Processor, Personal Computer,
1770-KF3, or PLC-5 (Hardware Handshaking Disabled) (1)
Peripheral
Device
9-Pin
(2)
(2)
1747-KE
GND
9-Pin
25-Pin
8
(3)
1
1
NC
DCD
1
2
RXD
TXD
3
2
3
TXD
RXD
2
3
4
DTR
DTR
4
20
5
COM
COM
5
7
6
DSR
DSR
6
6
7
RTS
RTS
7
4
8
CTS
CTS
8
5
9
NC
(2)
(2)
DTE
DTE
(1) You can also use cable 1747-CP3.
(2) Jumpers are only needed if you cannot disable the hardware handshaking on the port.
(3) Connect to the shield of the cable.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
B-16
RS-232 Communication Interface
1746-BAS to a Modem (Hardware Handshaking Enabled)
Peripheral
Device 9-Pin
1746-BAS
9-Pin
25-Pin
GND (1)
1
1
NC
DSR
6
6
2
RXD
RXD
2
3
3
TXD
TXD
3
2
4
DTR
DTR
4
20
5
COM
COM
5
7
6
DSR
DCD
1
8
7
RTS
RTS
7
4
8
CTS
CTS
8
5
NC
RI
9
22
9
DTE
DCE
(1) Connect to the shield of the cable.
1746-BAS to a SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 Processor, Personal
Computer, 1770-KF3, or PLC-5 (Hardware Handshaking Disabled) (1)
Peripheral
9-Pin
Device
9-Pin 1746-BAS
(2)
(2)
GND
(3)
1
1
NC
NC
1
8
2
RXD
TXD
3
2
3
TXD
RXD
2
3
4
DTR
DTR
4
20
5
COM
COM
5
7
6
DSR
DSR
6
6
7
RTS
RTS
7
4
8
CTS
CTS
8
5
9
NC
DTE
DTE
(1) You can also use cable 1747-CP3.
(2) Jumpers are only needed if you cannot disable the hardware handshaking on the port.
(3) Connect to the shield of the cable.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
25-Pin
(2)
(2)
RS-232 Communication Interface
B-17
1770-KF3 to a Modem (Hardware Handshaking Enabled)
Modem
25-Pin 1770-KF3
9-Pin
25-Pin
GND (1)
1
8
DCD
DCD
1
8
3
RXD
RXD
2
3
2
TXD
TXD
3
2
20
DTR
DTR
4
20
7
COM
COM
5
7
6
DSR
DSR
6
6
4
RTS
RTS
7
4
5
CTS
CTS
8
5
22
NC
RI
9
22
DTE
DCE
(1) Connect to the shield of the cable.
2760-RB to a Modem (Hardware Handshaking Enabled)
9-Pin
Modem
25-Pin 2760-RB
25-Pin
GND (1)
1
1
GND (1)
DCD
1
8
2
TXD
TXD
3
2
3
RXD
RXD
2
3
4
RTS
RTS
7
4
5
CTS
CTS
8
5
6
DSR
DSR
6
6
7
COM
COM
5
7
20
DTR
DTR
4
20
9
22
DTE
RI
DCE
(1) Connect the shield of the cable to the GND pin on one end only. Leave the other end open.
2760-RB to a SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 Processor, Personal Computer,
1770-KF3, or PLC-5 (Hardware Handshaking Disabled)
Peripheral
Device
9-Pin
(2)
(2)
25-Pin
25-Pin
2760-RB
1
GND (3)
DCD
1
8
2
TXD
RXD
3
2
3
RXD
TXD
2
3
4
RTS
DTR
7
4
5
CTS
COM
8
5
6
DSR
DSR
6
6
7
COM
RTS
5
7
DTR
CTS
4
20
20
DTE
GND (3)
1
(2)
(2)
DTE
(1) You can also use cable 1747-CP3.
(2) Jumpers are only needed if you cannot disable the hardware handshaking on the port.
(3) Connect the shield of the cable to the GND pin on one end only. Leave the other end open.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
B-18
RS-232 Communication Interface
PLC-5 (Channel 0) to a Modem (Hardware Handshaking Enabled)
Modem
25-Pin PLC-5, CH0
9-Pin
25-Pin
GND (1)
1
8
DCD
DCD
1
8
3
RXD
RXD
2
3
2
TXD
TXD
3
2
20
DTR
DTR
4
20
7
COM
COM
5
7
6
DSR
DSR
6
6
4
RTS
RTS
7
4
5
CTS
CTS
8
5
22
NC
RI
9
22
DTE
DCE
(1) Connect to the shield of the cable.
PLC-5 (Channel 0) to a SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 Processor, Personal
Computer, 1770-KF3, PLC-5, 1747-KE, or 1746-BAS (Hardware Handshaking
Disabled) (1)
Peripheral
Device
9-Pin
25-Pin PLC-5, CH0
(2)
(2)
GND(3)
1
8
DCD
DCD
1
8
3
RXD
TXD
3
2
2
TXD
RXD
2
3
20
DTR
DTR
4
20
7
COM
COM
5
7
6
DSR
DSR
6
6
4
RTS
RTS
7
4
5
CTS
CTS
8
5
22
NC
DTE
DTE
(1) You can also use cable 1747-CP3.
(2) Jumpers are only needed if you cannot disable the hardware handshaking on the port.
(3) Connect to the shield of the cable.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
25-Pin
(2)
(2)
RS-232 Communication Interface
Applications for the RS-232
Communication Interface
B-19
The figures below illustrate different applications for the RS-232
communication interface.
DF1 Full-Duplex Peer-to-Peer
Modem
Modem
SLC 5/03 Modular Controller
SLC 5/03 Modular Controller
Half-Duplex with Slave-to-Slave Routing
IMPORTANT
The 1747-KE module does not support slave-to-slave
transfers.
WINtelligent Linx or RSLinx
Running DF1 Half-Duplex
Protocol (Master)
Modem
Modem
SLC 5/03 Modular Controller
Modem
SLC 5/03 Modular Controller
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
B-20
RS-232 Communication Interface
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Appendix
C
Setting Up the DH+ Network
This appendix provides an overview of the Data Highway Plus (DH+)
communication protocol and explains how the SLC 5/04 processors
support it. This appendix also provides information on the following:
•
•
•
•
Data Highway Plus
Communication Protocol
Overview
DH+communication protocol overview
SLC 5/04 processor and DH+communication
wiring connectors for DH+ communication for SLC 5/04
typical DH+network configuration
Data Highway Plus implements peer-to-peer communication with a
token-passing scheme to rotate link mastership among a maximum of
64 nodes. Since this method does not require polling, it helps provide
time-efficient reliable data transport. The DH+ features:
• remote programming of PLC-2, PLC-3, PLC-5 and SLC 500
processors on your network
• direct connections to PLC-5 processors and industrial
programming terminals
• easy re-configuration and expansion if you want to add more
nodes later
• a communication rate of 57.6K baud, 115.2K baud, or
230.4K baud
IMPORTANT
1
A programming device, such as a personal computer,
using a 1784-KT Communication Interface module
does not operate faster than 57.6K baud. The
1784-KTX, -KTXD, -PKTX, -PKTXD, and -PCMK can
operate at all three communication rates.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
C-2
Setting Up the DH+ Network
The following table summarizes the type of termination resistor
needed to communicate at the specified baud rate with the maximum
cable length.
SLC 5/04 Processors and
DH+ Communication
Termination Link Resistor
Value Ω
Communication Rate
(Kbaud)
Maximum Cable Length
m (ft)
150
57.6
3,048 (10,000)
150
115
1,542 (5,000)
82
230.4
762 (2,500)
The SLC 5/04 processors let you operate DH+communication protocol
by means of the DH+communication channel 1. The SLC 5/04
processors also support DF1 full-duplex protocol, DF1 half-duplex
master and slave protocol, ASCII, or DH-485 via its RS-232 port,
channel 0. The 3-pin connector, provided with the SLC 5/04
processors, is for actual DH+communication and the 8-pin connector
is for monitoring DH+communication.
DH+ Channel 1, 3-Pin
Pin
Pin Name
1
DH+Data Line 1
2
Shield
3
DH+Data Line 2
DH+ Channel 1, 8-Pin
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Pin
Pin Name
1
DH+Data Line 2
2
No Connection
3
Shield
4
No Connection
5
No Connection
6
DH+Data Line 1
7
No Connection
8
No Connection
Setting Up the DH+ Network
C-3
The location of channel 1 is detailed in the drawing below.
SLC 5/04 CPU
RUN
FLT
BATT
FORCE
DH+
RS232
RUN REM PROG
DH+
Channel 1
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
C-4
Setting Up the DH+ Network
Wiring Connectors for DH+
Communication for SLC 5/04
Processors
To connect Allen-Bradley devices with other devices over DH+, you
must wire the 3-pin cable connectors so that communication can
occur through the cabling. Each device requires its own node address.
PROG
BATT
R
E
M
PROC
FORCE
RUN
COMM
SLC 5/04 CPU
RUN
FLT
BATT
SLC 5/04 CPU
FORCE
RUN
FORCE
DH+
FLT
DH+
RS232
RS232
BATT
RUN REM PROG
RUN REM PROG
A
Connector
1
2
B
Terminating
Resistor
Connector
Terminating
Resistor
Clear
Shield
Blue
Clear
Shield
Blue
1
2
PLC±5/20
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
Belden #9463
Connector
Clear
Shield
Blue
1
2
Belden #9463
Terminate the DH+ link on both ends by connecting a 150Ω, 1/2W
resistor between terminals 1 and 2 of the 3-pin connector when you
are communicating at 57.6K baud with a PLC-5 processor or 115.2K
baud with other SLC 5/04 processors. Use an 82Ω, 1/2W resistor if you
are communicating at 230.4K baud with other SLC 5/04 processors or
Series E enhanced PLC-5 processor.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Setting Up the DH+ Network
C-5
Minimizing Noise
To minimize the affect of noise on the SLC 5/04 processor, ground the
cable shields to earth via 0.01µF capacitors as shown in the DH+
wiring example below. Only directly ground the shield at one point
on the network.
PROG
BATT
R
E
M
PROC
FORCE
RUN
COMM
SLC 5/04 CPU
RUN
FLT
BATT
SLC 5/04 CPU
FORCE
RUN
FORCE
DH+
FLT
DH+
RS232
RS232
Earth Ground
0.01µF
BATT
RUN REM PROG
RUN REM PROG
Shield
1
2
Connector
Clear
Shield
Blue
Terminating
Resistor
A
Terminating
Resistor
Connector
Clear
Shield
Blue
Shield (1)
B
Connector
1
Clear
Shield
Blue
2
PLC±5/20
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
1
2
Shield
0.01µF
Earth Ground
Earth Ground
Belden #9463
Belden #9463
(1) To chassis ground directly at one point only in the network.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
C-6
Setting Up the DH+ Network
Typical DH+ Network
Configuration
The following figure illustrates a possible configuration for the
SLC 5/04 processor on a DH+network. You can also use an SLC 500,
SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, or SLC 5/05 processor in place of the
SLC 5/04 on the DH+network if the 1785-KA5 card is used with a
PLC-5.
PC with 1784-KTX, 1784-KTXD,
1784-PKTX, or 1784-PKTXD
APS
PLC-5/15
DH+ Network
PLC-5/15 with a 1785-KA5
1747-NET-AIC
Interface
Converter
SLC 5/04 Modular
Controller
1747-AIC
The PLC-5 and
1785-KA5 are
daisy chained
together.
1747-AIC
1747-AIC
1747-AIC
SLC 5/02 Modular Controller
SLC 5/03 Modular Controller
The DH+protocol uses factory set timeouts to restart token-passing
communication if the token is lost because of a defective node.
Other devices that use the DH+ network include those in the table
below.
Catalog Number
Description
Installation Requirement
Function
Publication
1784-KTX, -KTXD
PC DH+ Interface Card
ISA Bus
Provides DH+ or DH-485 connection
1784-6.5.22
1784-PCMK
PCMCIA Interface Card PCMCIA slot in computer
Provides DH+ or DH-485 connection
1784-6.5.19
1784-PKTX, -PKTXD
PC DH+ Interface Card
Provides DH+ or DH-485 connection
1784-6.5.27
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
PCI Bus
Appendix
D
Control Networks
This appendix provides a brief introduction about control networks.
For more information on using control networks, see the following
publications:
Control Network Publication
Publication
Number
Remote I/O
Direct Communication Module User Manual
1747-6.8
RIO Scanner User Manual
1747-6.6
DeviceNet Scanner Configuration Manual
1747-6.5.5
DeviceNet Interface User Manual
1761-6.5
SLC ControlNet Scanner Reference Manual
1747-RM623
DeviceNet
ControlNet
SLC 500 ControlNet RS-232 Interface Module 1747-5.34
User Manual
The Allen-Bradley Remote I/O Network is a master/slave control
network that enables chassis of I/O, operator interface terminals,
push-button panels, I/O blocks, message displays, drives, etc., to be
great distances from the host PLC processor. The SLC 500 fixed,
SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 can interface to
this network through the 1747-DCM module for distributed control.
The DCM allows the SLC 500 to look like another slave device on the
network.
Allen-Bradley Remote I/O
Network
Below is an example of the Allen-Bradley Remote I/O Network.
PLC-5 or SLC 5/02 and higher
processors with 1747-SN scanner
SLC Fixed
Controller
1747-DCM
1747-DCM
SLC 5/01
1747-DCM
SLC 5/03
1771 Remote I/O Network
PanelView Operator Terminal
1
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
D-2
Control Networks
With an SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 processor, a
1747-SN Remote I/O Scanner can be used as the master of a remote
I/O network.
1747-SN
1771 Remote I/O Network
Block I/O
1747-ASB
1747-ASB
PanelView Operator Terminal
Each 1747-SN Scanner supports 4 logical racks of 256 I/O each per
logical rack. If large amounts of data need to be transferred to a
device such as a PanelView Operator Interface, the 1747-SN Series B
Scanner supports block transfer of up to 64 words of data. Up to 16
devices can be connected to a single remote I/O network. The SLC
system supports multiple 1747-SN scanners if more devices are
required to be controlled by a single SLC processor.
Remote I/O Passthru
Remote I/O passthru allows you to communicate between a personal
computer on the same network as a SLC 5/03, 5/04, or 5/05 processor
to devices on the Remote I/O Network. For example, a personal
computer running PanelBuilder32 Software and communicating on
the DH+ network could upload and download applications from a
PanelView Operator Terminal communicating on the Remote I/O
network. This feature eliminates the need to physically connect the
personal computer to the PanelView Operator Terminal when you
need to change the application. This capability is available on the
1747-SN Series B Scanner, and the 1747-BSN Backup Scanner.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Control Networks
SLC 5/04
D-3
SLC 5/02
PC running
PanelView Software
1747-SN, Series B
1771 Remote I/O Network
DH+ Network
1747-DCM
Block I/O
PanelView Operator Terminal
TIP
DeviceNet Network
The SLC 5/03 OS302 or later, SLC 5/04 OS401 or
later, and SLC 5/05 support remote I/O passthru via
both their communication ports.
A DeviceNet network connects plant floor devices directly to the
control system (e.g., SLC 500 controller) reducing the number of I/O
interfaces and wiring associated with a typical hard-wired solution.
The DeviceNet communication network is a completely open device
network and has the support of industry’s leading sensor, actuator,
and control manufacturers.
The 1747-SDN DeviceNet Scanner
In a typical configuration, the 1747-SDN DeviceNet Scanner acts as an
interface between DeviceNet devices and the SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03,
SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors. The scanner communicates with
DeviceNet devices over the network to:
•
•
•
•
read inputs from a device
write outputs to a device
download configuration data
monitor a device’s operational status
The scanner communicates with the SLC 500 processors to exchange
I/O data. Information exchanged includes:
• device I/O data
• status information
• configuration data
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
D-4
Control Networks
A single scanner (master) can communicate with up to 63 nodes
(slaves) on DeviceNet. The SLC system supports multiple scanners if
more devices are required to be controlled by a single SLC 500
processor.
1747-SDN Scanner
SLC 5/02 or higher
processor
1770-KFD
RS-232
cable
PC with
RSNetworx for
DeviceNet
DeviceNet Network
Flex I/O
RediSTATION
1305 Drive
DeviceNet
Devices
The 1761-NET-DNI DeviceNet Interface
The DeviceNet Interface (DNI) is an intelligent DeviceNet to DF1
protocol conversion device that allows existing DF1 devices to
communicate on DeviceNet. The DF1 device is able to exchange I/O
data with a master device and is able to initiate and receive DF1
encapsulated DeviceNet messages across DeviceNet.
The DNI provides a single DeviceNet connection point and a single
RS-232 connection. The DeviceNet port is isolated from the DNI
digital logic and RS-232 port.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Control Networks
D-5
The primary functions of the DNI are:
• to collect and receive input data from the DF1 device connected
on its RS-232 port and forward that data to a connected master
on DeviceNet
• to monitor output data received from the DeviceNet master and
write that data to the DF1 device
• to allow DF1 devices to send and receive messages across the
DeviceNet network
The DNI can be used to interconnect:
• MicroLogix™ controllers
• PLC®-5 programmable controllers
• operator interface devices
• SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors
1747-SDN Scanner
SLC 5/03 or higher processor
Master/Slave I/O
Peer-to-Peer Messaging
DeviceNet Network
Node 3
PC with RSLogix500 and/or
DeviceNet Manager
DNI Module
Node 1
KFD
Node 2
MicroLogix Controller
DeviceNet Network Length
The DeviceNet network lengths are listed below.
Network Length
Baud Rate
100 m (328.08 ft)
500K baud
200 m (656.16 ft)
250K baud
500 m (1640.42 ft)
125K baud
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
D-6
Control Networks
ControlNet Network
ControlNet systems are designed to:
• provide high-speed, repeatable, deterministic I/O transmission
• allow control and message information to co-exist on the same
physical media
• make sure that I/O data transfers are not affected by
programming terminal activity or interscanner message activity
on the network
The 1747-SCNR ControlNet Scanner Module
The 1747-SCNR Scanner provides the capability for SLC processors to
produce or consume scheduled I/O to and from a ControlNet
network. Scheduled messaging allows the SLC processor program to
control I/O events in real time over ControlNet. The module connects
to a ControlNet network via the standard BNC connectors.
The 1747-KFC15 ControlNet Messaging Module
The 1747-KFC15 module provides the capability for SLC 5/03 and
higher processors to send or receive unscheduled ControlNet
messages. With unscheduled messages, the SLC processor program
can send peer-to-peer messages or be accessed and edited over the
ControlNet network using RSLogix 500™.
The 1747-KFC15 connects to the ControlNet network via the standard
BNC connectors and links to the SLC processor via a standard RS-232
cable. Other programming interfaces can connect to the ControlNet
network through the 1747-KFC15 module’s network access port.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Appendix
E
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet
Network
This appendix:
•
•
•
•
•
•
SLC 5/05 Processors and
Ethernet Communication
describes SLC 5/05 processors and Ethernet communication
describes SLC 5/05 performance considerations
describes Ethernet network connections and media
explains how the SLC 5/05 establishes node connections
lists Ethernet configuration parameters and procedures
describes configuration for subnet masks and gateways
Ethernet is a local area network that provides communication
between various devices at 10 Mbps. The physical communication
media options for the SLC 5/05 are:
• built-in
– twisted-pair (10Base-T)
• with media converters or hubs
– fiber optic
– broadband
– thick-wire coaxial cable (10Base-5)
– thin-wire coaxial cable (10Base-2)
See the following page for more information on Ethernet physical
media.
1
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
E-2
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
The SLC 5/05 supports Ethernet communication via the Ethernet
communication channel 1 shown in the drawing below.
SLC 5/05 CPU
RUN
FLT
FORCE
ENET
BATT
RS232
RUN REM PROG
Channel 1
Ethernet
(10Base-T)
Channel 0
RS-232
(DH485, DF1,
or ASCII)
SLC 5/05 Performance
Considerations
Actual performance of an SLC 5/05 processor varies according to:
•
•
•
•
size of Ethernet messages
frequency of Ethernet messages
network loading
the implementation of and performance of your processor
application program
Optimal Performance: RSLinx to SLC 5/05 Processor (2-node Ethernet network)
Operation
Words MSG per Second
Words per Second
Single Typed Read
1
50
50
Single Typed Reads
20
58
1160
Single Typed Reads
100
55
5500
Single Typed Reads
256
49
12,544
Optimal Performance: SLC 5/05 to SLC 5/05 Processor (2-node Ethernet network)
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Operation
Words MSG per Second
Words per Second
Single Typed Read
1
33
33
Single Typed Reads
20
34
680
Single Typed Reads
100
34
3400
Single Typed Reads
256
31
7936
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
SLC 5/05 and PC
Connections to the Ethernet
Network
E-3
The SLC 5/05 Ethernet connector conforms to ISO/IEC 8802-3 STD
802.3 and utilizes 10Base-T media. Connections are made directly
from the SLC 5/05 to an Ethernet hub. The network setup is simple
and cost effective. Typical network topology is pictured below.
Ethernet Network Topology
Ethernet Hub
to PC Ethernet Card
IMPORTANT
RJ45 connectors
on both ends of
cable (10Base-T)
to SLC 5/05 Channel 1
The SLC 5/05 processor contains a 10Base-T, RJ45
Ethernet connector which connects to standard
Ethernet hubs via 8-wire twisted-pair straight-through
cable. To access other Ethernet mediums, use
10Base-T media converters or Ethernet hubs that can
be connected together via fiber, thin-wire, or
thick-wire coaxial cables, or any other physical media
commercially available with Ethernet hubs.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
E-4
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
Ethernet Channel 1 8-Pin 10Base-T Connector
The Ethernet connector is an RJ45, 10Base-T connector. The pin-out
for the connector is shown below:
Pin
Pin Name
1
TD+
2
TD-
3
RD+
4
not used by 10BASE-T
5
not used by 10BASE-T
6
RD-
7
not used by 10BASE-T
8
not used by 10BASE-T
When to use straight-through and cross-over pin-out:
• SLC 5/05 Ethernet port to 10Base-T Ethernet hub cables utilize a
straight-through pin-out (1-1, 2-2, 3-3, 6-6).
• Direct point-to-point 10Base-T cables connecting the SLC 5/05
Ethernet port directly to another SLC 5/05 Ethernet port (or a
computer 10Base-T port) require a cross-over pin-out
(1-3, 2-6, 3-1, 6-2).
Cables
Shielded and non-shielded twisted-pair 10Base-T cables with RJ45
connectors are supported. The maximum cable length between an
SLC 5/05 Ethernet port and a 10Base-T port on an Ethernet hub
(without repeaters or fiber) is 100 meters (323 feet). However, in an
industrial application, cable length should be kept to a minimum.
Ethernet Connections
TCP/IP is the mechanism used to transport Ethernet messages. On top
of TCP, the Client/Server Protocol is required to establish sessions and
to send the MSG commands. Connections can be initiated by either a
client program (INTERCHANGE or RSLinx application) or a processor.
The client program or processor must first establish a connection to
the SLC 5/05 to enable the SLC 5/05 to receive solicited messages from
a client program or another processor.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
E-5
In order to send an outgoing message, the SLC 5/05 must first
establish a connection with the destination node at a specified IP
address on the Ethernet network. A connection is established when a
MSG instruction executes and no previous connection exists.
When a MSG instruction executes, the SLC 5/05 checks to see whether
a connection has been established with the destination node. If a
connection has not been established, the SLC 5/05 attempts to
establish a connection of the peer type.
In order to receive messages from another device on Ethernet, an
“incoming” connection must be established. This incoming connection
is made by the sending processor and uses one incoming connection
in the receiving processor.
The SLC 5/05 supports a maximum of 16 connections, allowing
simultaneous communication with up to 16 other devices or
applications. The connections are dedicated as follows:
Number of Connections(1)
Dedicated to:
4
outgoing connections
4
incoming connections
8 or 16 (2)
either incoming or outgoing connections
(1) Connections established by an INTERCHANGE client, RSLinx client, and peers are all included when
counting the number of connections.
(2) 1747-L522, -L553 processors with OS501, Series C, FRN 5 or higher only.
IMPORTANT
Configuring the Ethernet
Channel on the SLC 5/05
For outgoing connections, no more that one
connection per destination node is established. If
multiple MSG instructions use the same destination
node, they share the same connection.
There are two ways to configure the SLC 5/05 Ethernet channel 1. The
configuration can be done via a BOOTP request at processor
powerup, or by manually setting the configuration parameters using
RSLogix 500 Programming Software. The configuration parameters are
shown on the following page, and the configuration procedures
follow.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
E-6
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
Parameter
Description
Default
Status
Diagnostic File The file number of the diagnostic counter for this channel. A Diagnostic File Number value
Number
of zero means that no diagnostics file has been configured for this channel. The Diagnostic
File Number must be an integer within the limits of 7, 9 to 255.
0
read/write
MSG
Connection
Timeout
The amount of time (in ms) allowed for a MSG instruction to establish a connection with the
destination node. The MSG Connection Timeout has 250 ms resolution and a range from 250
to 65,500.
15,000 ms
read/write
MSG Reply
Timeout
The amount of time (in ms) that the SLC 5/05 will wait for a reply to a command that it has
initiated via a MSG instruction. The MSG Reply Timeout has 250 ms resolution and a range
from 250 to 65,500.
3,000 ms
read/write
Inactivity
Timeout
The amount of time (in minutes) that a MSG connection may remain inactive before it is
terminated. The Inactivity Timeout has a 1 minute resolution and a range from 1 to 65,500
minutes.
30 minutes
read/write
IP Address
The SLC 5/05 internet address (in network byte order). The internet address must be
specified to connect to the TCP/IP network.
0
(undefined)
read/write
Subnet Mask
The SLC 5/05 subnet mask (in network byte order). The Subnet Mask is used to interpret IP
addresses when the internet is divided into subnets. A Subnet Mask of all zeros indicates
that no subnet mask has been configured.
0
read/write
Gateway
Address
The address of a gateway (in network byte order) that provides connection to another IP
network. A Gateway Address of all zeros indicates that no gateway has been configured.
0
read/write
BOOTP Enable The BOOTP enable switch. When BOOTP is enabled, the SLC 5/05 attempts to learn its
network related parameters at powerup via a BOOTP request. There must be a BOOTP
server on the network capable of responding to this BOOTP request. When BOOTP is
disabled, the SLC 5/05 uses the locally configured network related parameters (IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Broadcast Address, etc.).
1 (enabled)
read/write
Hardware
Address
Ethernet
hardware
address
read only
The SLC 5/05 Ethernet hardware address.
Configuration Using
RSLogix 500 Programming
Software
Refer to the documentation provided with your programming
software.
Configuration Via BOOTP
BOOTP (bootstrap protocol) is a low-level protocol that TCP/IP nodes
use to obtain start-up information. By default, the SLC 5/05 broadcasts
BOOTP requests at powerup. The BOOTP Valid parameter remains
clear until a BOOTP reply has been received. BOOTP lets you
dynamically assign IP Addresses to processors on the Ethernet Link.
To use BOOTP, a BOOTP Server must exist on the local Ethernet
subnet. The server is a computer that has BOOTP Server software
installed and reads a text file containing network information for
individual nodes on the network.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
E-7
The host system’s BOOTP configuration file must be updated to
service requests from SLC 5/05 processors. The following parameters
must be configured:
Parameter
Description
IP Address
A unique IP Address for the SLC 5/05 processor.
Subnet Mask
Specifies the net and local subnet mask as per the standard on subnetting
RFC 950, Internet Standard Subnetting Procedure.
Gateway
Specifies the IP address of a gateway on the same subnet as the
SLC 5/05 that provides connections to another IP network.
TIP
You can use any commercially available BOOTP
server. If you do not have BOOTP Server capabilities
on your network, and you want to dynamically
configure Channel 1, you can download the free
Rockwell Automation BOOTP server from the
Rockwell Automation website. Go to
www.ab.com/networks/bootp/index.html
When BOOTP is enabled, the following events occur at power-up:
• The processor broadcasts a BOOTP-request message containing
its hardware address over the local network or subnet.
• The BOOTP server compares the hardware address with the
addresses in its look-up table.
• The BOOTP server sends a message back to the processor with
the IP address and other network information that corresponds
to the hardware address it received.
With all hardware and IP addresses in one location, you can easily
change IP addresses in the BOOTP configuration file if your network
needs change.
The BOOTP request can be disabled by clearing the BOOTP Enable
parameter in the channel Configuration File. When BOOTP Enable is
cleared (disabled), the SLC 5/05 uses the existing channel
configuration data.
IMPORTANT
If BOOTP is disabled, or no BOOTP server exists on
the network, you must use SLC 500 programming
software to enter/change the IP address for each
processor.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
E-8
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
Using the Rockwell BOOTP Utility
The Rockwell BOOTP utility is a standalone program that incorporates
the functionality of standard BOOTP software with a user-friendly
graphical interface. It is located in the Utils directory on the
RSLogix 5000 installation CD. It can also be downloaded from
www.ab.com/networks/bootp/index.html web page. The device
must have BOOTP enabled (factory default) to use the utility.
To configure your device using the BOOTP utility, perform the
following steps:
1. Run the BOOTP software. In the BOOTP Request History
panel you will see the hardware addresses of devices issuing
BOOTP requests.
2. Double-click on the hardware address of the device you want to
configure. You will see the New Entry pop-up window with the
device's Ethernet Address (MAC).
3. Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway you want to
assign to the device, and click on OK.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
E-9
The device will be added to the Relation List, displaying the
Ethernet Address (MAC) and corresponding IP Address, Subnet
Mask, and Gateway (if applicable).
Using DCHP Software To
Configure Your Processor
DHCP software automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations
logging onto a TCP/IP network. DHCP is based on BOOTP and
maintains some backward compatibility. The main difference is that
BOOTP was designed for manual configuration, while DHCP allows
for dynamic allocation of network addresses and configurations to
newly attached devices.
Be cautious about using DHCP software to configure your SLC 5/05
processor. A BOOTP client can boot from a DHCP server only if the
DHCP server is specifically written to also handle BOOTP queries.
This is specific to the DHCP software package you use. Check with
your system administrator to see if your DHCP package supports
BOOTP commands and manual IP allocation.
ATTENTION
!
The processor must be assigned a fixed network
address. The IP address of the processor must not be
dynamically provided. Failure to observe this
precaution may result in unintended machine
motion or loss of process control.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
E-10
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
Using Subnet Masks and
Gateways
Configure subnet masks and gateways using the Ethernet channel 1
configuration screen.
IMPORTANT
If BOOTP is enabled, you can’t change any of the
advanced Ethernet communications characteristics.
If your network is divided into subnetworks that use gateways or
routers, you must indicate the following information when configuring
channel 1:
• subnet mask
• gateway address
A subnet mask is a filter that a node applies to IP addresses to
determine if an address is on the local subnet or on another subnet. If
an address is located on another subnetwork, messages are routed
through a local gateway to be transferred to the destination
subnetwork.
If your network is not divided into subnets, then leave the subnet
mask field at the default.
If you are
Then
manually configuring channel 1
and have a network with subnets
•
be sure the BOOTP enable field is disabled
•
use your programming software to enter the
subnet mask and gateway address.
using BOOTP to configure channel •
1 and have a network with
•
subnets
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
be sure BOOTP is enabled
include the subnet mask(s) and gateway
address(es)
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
E-11
Manually Configuring Channel 1 for Processors on Subnets
If you are manually configuring channel 1 for a processor located on a
subnet, deselect the “BOOTP Enable” option by clicking on the
checked box.
See the table below to configure the subnet mask and gateway
address fields for each processor via your programming software.
This field:
Specifies:
Configure by doing the following:
Subnet Mask
The processor’s subnet mask.
Enter an address of the following form:
The subnet mask is used to interpret IP
addresses when the internet is divided
into subnets.
a.b.c.d Where: a, b, c, d are between 0 to 255 (decimal)
Gateway Address The IP address of the gateway that
provides a connection to another IP
network.
This field is required when you
communicate with other devices not on a
local subnet.
If your network is not divided into subnets, then leave the subnet mask
field at the default. If you change the default and need to reset it, type
0.0.0.0.
Enter an address of the following form:
a.b.c.d Where: a, b, c, d are between 0 to 255 (decimal)
The default address is No Gateway.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
E-12
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
SLC 5/05 Embedded Web
Server Capability
SLC 5/05 processors with OS501, Series C, FRN 6 (or higher) include
not only the embedded web server (introduced in FRN 5) which
allows viewing of module information, TCP/IP configuration, and
diagnostic information, but an enhanced version that also allows
viewing of the data table memory map, data table monitor screen, and
user-provided web pages via Ethernet using a standard web browser.
In order to view the web server main menu from a standard web
browser, type in http://www.xxx.yyy.zzz for the web address, where
www.xxx.yyy.zzz is the IP address of the SLC 5/05 processor.
The following topics appear on the home page main menu, as shown
below:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Module Information
TCP/IP Configuration
Diagnostic Information
Data Table Memory Map
Data Table Monitor
User Provided Pages
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
E-13
Module Information
The module information page displays a table with information about
the processor. The specific information displayed includes the
processor model, series/revision of the processor, mode of the
processor and the name of the program in the processor. Also
displayed is the revision/build of the Ethernet firmware and the
module uptime (time since power was last applied).
TCP/IP Configuration Data (Read Only)
This page displays a table with information about the current TCP/IP
configuration parameters. Included are the module’s IP address, the
subnet mask, gateway address, the Ethernet hardware address and
whether BOOTP is enabled. Also included are the name server,
secondary name server and the default domain name parameters, if
configured.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
E-14
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
Diagnostic Information
This section gives you access to the various diagnostic information
screens that are available. It is divided into two sections, the Network
Stack Statistics and Application Level Statistics. The Network Stack
Statistics detail information about the TCP/IP stack, while the
Application Level Statistics are related to the Allen-Bradley Client
Server Protocol (CSP) and Control and Information Protocol (CIP)
diagnostics.
The individual diagnostic screens automatically refresh using a time
which is configurable by the user and defaults to 15 seconds.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
E-15
Data Table Memory Map
The Data Table Memory Map page displays a list of the data table
files, their type, and size in elements for a connected SLC 5/05, as
shown in the following example:
Each file contains a hyperlink that takes you to the specific Data Table
Monitor page for that file. When you click on a particular file, the Data
Table Monitor page appears, displaying the contents of the data table
file you selected.
The available and default display formats depend on the data type of
the file.
Press the Prev or Next buttons to display the previous or next page of
the data table file, if any.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
E-16
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
You can change the Data Table Address, Display format and Refresh
data every xx seconds fields by entering data in the text boxes and
clicking the Change Parameters button.
To change the refresh data function back to the default of 15 seconds,
click the Default field. To disable the refresh data function, click the
Disable button.
Data Table Monitor
You may also go directly to the Data Table Monitor screen by
selecting it on the home page or by clicking on D/T Monitor on the
bottom row of the other pages. In this case, since a particular data file
has not been chosen, a default screen is displayed.
From here you may enter in the starting data table address to display.
User Provided Pages
You can use a text editor to generate up to 16 user-provided web
pages. Each page is stored in four consecutive ASCII files of the SLC
5/05 processor. The channel configuration feature of RSLogix 500
(version 6.0 or later) allows you to select the starting file number and
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
E-17
the number of user pages to be stored, as shown in the following
example:
RSLogix 500 (version 6.0 or later) also allows you to import an HTML
file from your PC to specified ASCII files in the SLC 5/05 processor.
See page E-20 for details.
HTML Pages
Referencing Other Pages/Servers - following are some basic
considerations when referencing other pages or servers:
• reference User Specified Pages in the SLC 5/05 by using the
names user1.html through user16.html
• to reference a page on the same processor, specify a URL such
as /user2.html
• to reference a page on another processor, specify a URL such as
http://www.xxx.yyy.zzz/user2.html, where www.xxx.yyy.zzz is
the IP address of the processor
• you can reference other WWW servers and display images from
other sources without affecting your usage of data table memory
(except for the size of the HTTP reference)
Referencing Data Table Memory - reference data table memory
locations by placing custom tags into your HTML source which specify
the data table location and optional formatting information. Use the
following format for the custom tag:
<!ABDTR-file_type{file_number}:{file_element}[,#elements][%format]>
The items surrounded by {} are sometimes optional. The items
surrounded by [] are always optional.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
E-18
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
You must always specify the basic file reference. Depending on which
file is being referenced, file_number or file_element may be defaulted.
If the file_type is I, O or S, the file_number does not need to be
specified, but the file_element must be specified. If the file_type is not
one of the three special files, the file_number must be specified and
the file_element may default to zero (the input, output and status files
have fixed file numbers).
When defining your custom tag, consider the following:
Tag Item
Description
#elements
If not specified, this defaults to one. If it is less than one, it also
defaults to one. Each element is output using the same format
(whether specified with %format or defaulted).
%format
Legal values are %d for decimal and %x for hexadecimal. The
following file types allow the format to be specified
•
•
•
•
Input
Output
Status
Integer
• Timer
• Counter
• Control
Display format
defaults
Input and Output file elements are output in decimal format. Status
file elements are output in hexadecimal format with a leading 0x.
Integer file elements are output in decimal format. Complex data
types (Timer, Counter, Control) are output as a table with bits and
important words specified.
Fixed display
formats
Float files are always output in floating point format (“C”%g
format). ASCII and STring files are always output as a null
terminated text string. Binary files are always output as two binary
bytes.
HTML Examples - the following example shows an HTML code
segment with a short description of what you would see on a web
browser:
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Examples
HTML Code
Web Browser Displays
Input image word I:0
<!ABDTR-I:0>
the value of the first word of the
input image table in the default
format of decimal with bold type
Timer T4:0
<!ABDTR-T4:0>
the values of the timer in T4:0 in
the default format of a table
Timer T4:0
<!ABDTR-T4:0%d>
the values of the three words
comprising timer T4:0 in decimal
with bold type
N24:0 to N24:3
<!ABDTR-N24:0,4>
the values of the four words in
N24:0 through N24:3 in decimal
with bold type
S:21 to S:23
<!ABDTR-S:21, 3%d>
the values of the three words in
S:21 through S:23 in decimal with
bold type
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
E-19
Generating Custom Data Table Monitor Pages
You can generate Custom Data Table Monitor pages with your text
editor then download them to the SLC 5/05 processor using
RSLogix 500 version 6.0 or later. The first element of the file must
contain a special tag as follows:
<!ABCDM-xx>
where xx is the automatic refresh rate in seconds (01 to 99).
A value outside the range defaults to a “snapshot” display.
You can modify the refresh rate three different ways:
• enter the desired refresh rate and press the Change button
• select the Default button for a 15 second refresh
• disable the refresh by selecting the Disable button
Referencing Data Table Memory - the Data Table locations in the
Custom Data Table Monitor are referenced by placing custom tags into
the ASCII file of the processor. The format of the custom tag is:
<!ABDTR-file_type{file_number}:{file_element}[,#elements][%format]
[#expand][!comment]>
The items surrounded with {} are sometimes optional, whereas the
items surrounded by [] are always optional.
You must always specify the basic file reference. Depending on which
file is being referenced, file_number or file_element may be defaulted.
If the file_type is I, O or S, the file_number does not need to be
specified, but the file_element must be specified. If the file_type is not
one of the three special files, the file_number must be specified and
the file_element may default to zero (because the input, output and
status files have fixed numbers).
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
E-20
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
When defining your custom tag, consider the following:
Tag Item
Description
#elements
If not specified, this defaults to one. If it is less than one,
also defaults to one. Each element is output using the same
format (whether specified with %format or defaulted). Any
associated comment is displayed only for the first element.
%format
Legal values are %b for binary, %d for decimal, %0 for
octal and %x for hexadecimal. The following file types
allow the format to be specified:
• Input
• Output
• Status
• Integer
All other file types are displayed in an appropriate format.
If a %format modifier is present, the format may be
changed by clicking on the file type/number via a web
browser.
#expand
Legal values are #c and #e. This modifier determines
whether the structure file types are displayed in their
expanded or compact formats. If a # modifier is present, the
format may be changed by clicking on the [+]/[-] via a web
browser. If a #modifier is not present, the default display of
expanded is used.
!comment
Data after the exclamation point and up to the closing > is
displayed in the Comment column of the monitor.
Fixed display formats
Float files are always output in floating point format
(“C”%g format). String files are always output as a null
terminated text string. Binary files are always output as
four binary nibbles. ASCII files are displayed in a memory
dump format.
Importing User Page Files to the SLC 5/05 Processor
Use RSLogix 500 to import user page files to the SLC 5/05 ASCII files:
1. In the Project folder (under the Data Files folder), right-click on
the first of the block of four consecutive ASCII files where you
will import the user page HTML file.
2. Click on Properties.
3. Click on Import HTML.
4. Use the browser to locate the user page HTML file you want to
import.
5. Double-click on the file to select it.
6. Click OK.
7. Repeat this process for each user page file.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
E-21
8. When all user page files have been imported, go online with
your SLC 5/05 processor.
9. Select the User Provided Pages link to view the User Provided
Pages menu, as shown in the following example:
Click on the User Provided Page #X to display that specific page.
You can change the radix display of I, O, S, and N file addresses,
which appear with an underline.
1. Go back to the User-Provided Custom Data Table Monitor page.
2. In the Address column, click on an underlined address to
display the radix selection page.
3. Click on a radio button to select the desired radix type.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
E-22
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
To see the Sample Extended Format page:
1. Go back to the User-Provided Custom Data Table Monitor page.
2. In the Address column, click on the + before an address to
display the Sample Extended Format.
Click on the link under the file heading to display an ASCII dump of
the ASCII file. For example, click on the A116 to display the following
screen:
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Appendix
F
Power Supply Worksheet
Power Supply Loading
Use the table below to calculate the power supply loading for each
chassis in your SLC modular application.
Hardware Component Catalog Numbers
Processors
Input Modules
at 5V dc
at 24V dc
1747-L511
0.350
0.105
1747-L514
0.350
0.105
1747-L524
0.350
0.105
1747-L531
0.500
0.175
1747-L532
0.500
0.175
1747-L541
1.000
0
1747-L542
1.000
0
1747-L543
1.000
0
1747-L551
1.000
0
1747-L552
1.000
0
1747-L553
1.000
0
1746-IA4
0.035
-
1746-IA8
0.050
-
1746-IA16
0.085
-
1746-IB8
0.050
-
1746-IB16
0.085
-
1746-IB32(1)
0.050
-
1746-IC16
0.085
-
1746-IG16
0.140
-
1746-IH16
0.085
-
1746-IM4
0.035
-
1746-IM8
0.050
-
1746-IM16
0.085
-
1746-IN16
0.085
-
1746-ITB16
0.085
-
1746-ITV16
0.085
-
1746-IV8
0.050
-
0.085
-
0.050
-
1746-IV16
1746-IV32
1
Maximum Current (A)
(1)
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
F-2
Power Supply Worksheet
Hardware Component Catalog Numbers
Output Modules
at 5V dc
at 24V dc
1746-OA8
0.185
-
1746-OA16
0.370
-
1746-OAP12
0.370
-
1746-OB8
0.135
-
0.280
-
1746-OB32
0.190
-
1746-OBP8
0.135
-
1746-OBP16
0.250
-
1746-OB16E
0.135
-
1746-OB32E
0.190
-
1746-OG16
0.180
-
1746-OV8
0.135
-
1746-OV16
0.270
-
1746-OV32(1)
0.190
-
1746-OVP16
0.250
-
1746-OW4
0.045
0.045
1746-OW8
0.085
0.090
1746-OW16
0.170
0.180
1746-OX8
0.085
0.090
1746-IO4
0.030
0.025
1746-IO8
0.060
0.045
1746-IO12
0.090
0.070
1746-IO12DC
0.080
0.060
1746-BAS (-T)
0.150
0.040(2)
1746-BLM
1.000
-
1746-BTM
0.110
0.085
1746-FIO4I
0.055
0.150
1746-FIO4V
0.055
0.120
1746-HSCE
0.320
-
1746-HSCE2
0.250
-
1746-HSRV
0.300
-
1746-HSTP1
0.300
-
1746-INT4
0.060
0.040
1746-MPM
0.110
0.085
1746-NI4
0.025
0.085
1746-NI8
0.200
0.100
1746-NI16 (I/V)
0.125
0.075
1746-NIO4I
0.055
0.145
1746-NIO4V
0.055
0.115
1746-OB16
(1)
Input and Output
Modules
Specialty Modules
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Maximum Current (A)
Power Supply Worksheet
Hardware Component Catalog Numbers
Specialty Modules
Peripheral Devices
Maximum Current (A)
at 5V dc
at 24V dc
1746-NO4I
0.055
0.195
1746-NO4V
0.055
0.145
1746-NR4
0.050
0.050
1746-NT4
0.060
0.040
1746-NT8
0.120
0.070
1746-QS
1.000
0.200
1746-QV
0.215
-
0.900
-
1747-ACNR15
0.900
-
1747-ASB
0.375
-
1747-BSN
0.800
0
1747-DCM
0.360
-
1747-KE
0.150
0.040(2)
1747-KFC15
0.640
0
1747-SCNR
0.900
-
1747-SDN
0.500
-
1747-SN
0.600
-
1747-AIC
0
0.085
1747-DTAM
0
(3)
1747-PIC
0
(3)
1747-PSD
NA
NA
1747-PT1
Series A and B
0
(3)
1761-NET-AIC(4)
0
0
Communication Modules 1747-ACN15
F-3
(1) Power supply loading for Series D and later modules.
(2) When using the BAS or KE modules to supply power to an AIC draws its power through the module. Add 0.085A
(the current loading for the AIC) to the BAS or KE module’s power supply loading value at 24V dc.
(3) The 24V dc loading values of the HHT, PIC, and DTAM are included in the 24V dc loading value of the processor.
(4) Current for the 1761-NET-AIC must be supplied from an external 24V dc source. No current is consumed from
the controller when an external source is used.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
F-4
Power Supply Worksheet
Blank Worksheet
Procedure
1. For each slot of the chassis that contains a module, list the slot number, the catalog number of the module, and its 5V and 24V maximum currents.
Also include the power consumption of any peripheral devices that may be connected to the processor other than a DTAM, HHT, or PIC—the power
consumption of these devices is accounted for in the power consumption of the processor.
Chassis Number
Slot Number
Maximum Currents
Catalog Number at 5V dc
at 24V dc
Chassis Number
Slot Number
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Peripheral Device
Peripheral Device
Peripheral Device
Peripheral Device
2. Add the loading currents of all the system
devices at 5 and 24V dc to determine the
Total Current.
Maximum Currents
Catalog Number at 5V dc
at 24V dc
2. Add the loading currents of all the system
devices at 5 and 24V dc to determine the
Total Current.
3. For 1746-P4 power supplies, calculate the total power consumption of all system devices. If you are not using a 1746-P4, go to step 4.
Current
Multiply by = Watts
Current
Multiply
by
Total Current at 5V dc
5V
Total Current at 5V dc
5V
Total Current
at 24V dc
24V
Total Current
at 24V dc
24V
User Current
at 24V dc
24V
User Current
at 24V dc
24V
Add the Watts values to determine Total Power
Add the Watts values to determine Total Power
(cannot exceed 70 Watts)
(cannot exceed 70 Watts)
= Watts
4. Choose the power supply from the list of catalog numbers shown below. Compare the Total Current required for the chassis with the Internal Current
capacity of the power supplies. Be sure that the Total Current consumption for the chassis is less than the Internal Current Capacity for the power
supply, for both 5V and 24V loads.
Catalog Number
Internal Current
Capacity
at 5V dc
at 24V dc
1746-P1
2.0A
0.46A
1746-P2
5.0A
1746-P3
3.6A
1746-P4 (see step 3)
1746-P5
1746-P6
1746-P7(1)
Catalog Number
at 5V dc
at 24V dc
1746-P1
2.0A
0.46A
0.96A
1746-P2
5.0A
0.96A
0.87A
1746-P3
3.6A
0.87A
10.0A
2.88A
1746-P4 (see step 3)
10.0A
2.88A
5.0A
0.96A
1746-P5
5.0A
0.96A
5.0A
0.96A
1746-P6
12V Input
2.0A
0.46A
1746-P7(1)
24V Input
3.6A
0.87A
Required Power Supply
(1) See P7 current capacity chart on page 2-15.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Internal Current
Capacity
5.0A
0.96A
12V Input
2.0A
0.46A
24V Input
3.6A
0.87A
Required Power Supply
Appendix
G
Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500
Control System
This appendix will assist you in calculating the heat dissipation of
your SLC 500 controller. It consists of the following:
•
•
•
•
definition of key terms
table and graphs
example heat dissipation calculation
heat dissipation worksheet
To select an enclosure see page 2-18.
Definition of Key Terms
The following terms are used throughout this appendix. Familiarize
yourself with them before proceeding further.
Watts per Point — maximum heat dissipation that can occur in each
field wiring point when energized.
Minimum Watts — amount of heat dissipation that can occur when
there is no field power present.
Total Watts — the watts per point plus the minimum watts (with all
points energized).
Calculating Module Heat
Dissipation
To calculate the heat dissipation of your SLC controller you must
consider two things:
• the maximum heat dissipated (with field power applied) by the
processor, all I/O and specialty modules, and any peripheral
devices for each chassis.
• the heat dissipated by the power supply. This is determined by
the maximum load on the power supply of the processor, each
I/O and specialty module, peripheral device, and device
drawing power directly off the power supply via the “POWER
OUT” terminals.
1
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
G-2
Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System
Calculated Watts vs. Total Watts
You calculate maximum heat dissipation by using one of these
methods:
• calculated watts method
• total watts method
Use calculated watts if you know exactly how many outputs and
inputs on each card are active at any given time. This method will
give you a lower, more accurate heat dissipation calculation than the
total watts method. With this method, use the formula below for
calculating the heat dissipation of each module. Then use these values
in step 1 of the Example Worksheet for Calculating Heat Dissipation
on page G-8.
(points energized x watts per point) + minimum watts = heat
dissipation of module
Use total watts if you are not sure how many points on a module are
energized at any time. Total watts is the watts per point (with all
points energized) plus the minimum watts. Total watts generated by
each module are provided in the table on page G-3.
Once you have determined which method you will use to calculate
the heat dissipation of your modules, see the Example Worksheet for
Calculating Heat Dissipation on page G-8. This worksheet shows you
how to calculate the heat dissipation for the example SLC control
system on page G-7.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System
G-3
Power Supply Loading Reference Table
Use the table below to calculate the power supply loading and heat
dissipation for each chassis in your SLC modular application.
Hardware
Component
Catalog Numbers
Watts per Point
Minimum Watts
Total Watts
Processors
1747-L511
NA
1.75
1.75
1747-L514
NA
1.75
1.75
1747-L524
NA
1.75
1.75
1747-L531
NA
1.75
1.75
1747-L532
NA
2.90
2.90
1747-L541
NA
4.00
4.00
1747-L542
NA
4.00
4.00
1747-L543
NA
4.00
4.00
1747-L551
NA
4.00
4.00
1747-L552
NA
4.00
4.00
1747-L553
NA
4.00
4.00
1746-IA4
0.270
0.175
1.30
1746-IA8
0.270
0.250
2.40
1746-IA16
0.270
0.425
4.80
1746-IB8
0.200
0.250
1.90
Input Modules
1746-IB16
0.200
0.425
3.60
0.200
0.530
6.90
1746-IC16
0.220
0.425
3.95
1746-IG16
0.020
0.700
1.00
1746-IH16
0.320
0.675
3.08
1746-IM4
0.350
0.175
1.60
1746-IM8
0.350
0.250
3.10
1746-IM16
0.350
0.425
6.00
1746-IN16
0.350
0.425
6.00
1746-ITB16
0.200
0.425
3.625
1746-ITV16
0.200
0.425
3.625
1746-IV8
0.200
0.250
1.90
1746-IV16
0.200
0.425
3.60
1746-IV32(1)
0.200
0.530
6.90
1746-IB32
(1)
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
G-4
Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System
Hardware
Component
Catalog Numbers
Watts per Point
Minimum Watts
Total Watts
1746-OA8
1.000
0.925
9.00
1746-OA16
0.462
1.850
9.30
1746-OAP12
1.000
1.850
10.85
1746-OB8
0.775
0.675
6.90
0.338
1.400
7.60
0.078
2.260
4.80
1746-OBP8
0.300
0.675
3.08
1746-OBP16
0.310
1.250
6.21
1746-OB16E
0.338
1.400
7.60
1746-OB32E
0.078
2.260
4.80
1746-OG16
0.033
0.900
1.50
1746-OV8
0.775
0.675
6.90
1746-OV16
0.388
1.400
7.60
1746-OV32(1)
0.078
2.260
4.80
1746-OVP16
0.310
1.250
6.21
1746-OW4
0.133
1.310
1.90
1746-OW8
0.138
2.590
3.70
1746-OW16
0.033
5.170
5.70
1746-OX8
0.825
2.590
8.60
1746-IO4
0.270 per input pt.
0.133 per output pt.
0.750
1.60
1746-IO8
0.270 per input pt.
0.133 per output pt.
1.380
3.00
1746-IO12
0.270 per input pt.
0.133 per output pt.
2.130
4.60
1746-IO12DC
0.200 per input pt.
0.133 per output pt.
1.840
3.90
1746-BAS
NA
3.750
3.800
1746-BLM
NA
1746-BTM
NA
1746-FIO4I
NA
3.760
3.800
1746-FIO4V
NA
3.040
3.100
1746-HSCE
NA
1.600
1.600
1746-HSCE2
NA
1746-HSRV
NA
1746-HSTP1
NA
1746-INT4
NA
1746-MPM
NA
1746-NI4
NA
2.170
2.20
1746-NI8
NA
1746-NI16
NA
1746-NIO4I
NA
3.760
3.80
1746-OB16
1746-OB32
Output Modules
Input and Output Modules
Specialty Modules
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
(1)
Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System
G-5
Hardware
Component
Catalog Numbers
Watts per Point
Minimum Watts
Total Watts
Specialty Modules
1746-NIO4V
NA
3.040
3.10
1746-NO4I
NA
4.960
5.00
1746-NO4V
NA
3.780
3.80
1746-NR4
NA
1.500
1.500
1746-NT4
NA
0.800
0.800
1746-NT8
NA
1746-QS
NA
1746-QV
NA
1747-ACN15
NA
1747-ACNR15
NA
1747-ASB
NA
1.875
1.875
1747-DCM
NA
1.800
1.800
1747-KE
NA
3.750
3.800
1747-KFC15
NA
3.200
3.200
1747-SCNR
NA
1747-SDN
NA
1747-SN
NA
4.500
4.500
1747-AIC
NA
2.000
2.000
1747-DTAM
NA
2.500
2.500
1747-PIC
NA
2.000
2.000
1747-PSD
NA
NA
NA
1747-PT1
Series A and B
NA
2.500
2.500
1761-NET-AIC(2)
NA
2.500
2.500
1761-NET-DNI
NA
2.500
2.500
1761-NET-ENI(W)(2)
NA
2.000
2.000
Communication Modules
1747-BSN
Peripheral Devices
(1) Power supply loading for Series D and later modules.
(2) Current for the 1761-NET-AIC and 1761-NET-ENI may be supplied from the SLC power supply or from an external 24V dc source.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
G-6
Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System
Power Supply Heat Dissipation Graphs
1746-P1 Power Supply Change in Power
Dissipation due to Output Loading
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
0
5
10 15 20 25
Power Supply Loading (Watts)
Power Supply Dissipation (Watts)
Power Supply Dissipation (Watts)
Use the graphs below for determining the power supply dissipation in
step 2 of the Example Worksheet for Calculating Heat Dissipation.
25
20
15
10
5
0
1746-P4 Power Supply Change in Power
Dissipation due to Output Loading
Power Supply Dissipation (Watts)
Power Supply Dissipation (Watts)
1746-P3 Power Supply Change in Power
Dissipation due to Output Loading
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
Power Supply Loading (Watts)
10
20
30
40
50
Power Supply Loading (Watts)
60
25
20
15
10
5
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Power Supply Loading (Watts)
1746-P6 Power Supply Change in Power
Dissipation due to Output Loading
Power Supply Dissipation (Watts)
Power Supply Dissipation (Watts)
1746-P5 Power Supply Change in Power
Dissipation due to Output Loading
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
0
1746-P2 Power Supply Change in Power
Dissipation due to Output Loading
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
0
10 20 30 40 50 60
Power Supply Loading (Watts)
25
20
15
10
5
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Power Supply Loading (Watts)
Power Supply Dissipation (Watts)
1746-P7 Power Supply Change in Power
Dissipation due to Output Loading
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
24V input
12V input
0
20 40 60 80 100
Power Supply Loading (Watts)
Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System
Example Heat Dissipation
Calculation
G-7
If your controller consisted of the following hardware components,
you would calculate heat dissipation as shown in the worksheet on
page G-8.
DTAM
Chassis 1
Chassis 2
Peripheral Device
Slot
0
1
2
Slot
3
4
5
6
7
User Power to
Peripheral
The following table details the total watts dissipated by the modules
and peripheral devices in the above SLC 500 controller. The numbers
were taken from the tables on page G-3.
Chassis 1
Chassis 2
Slot Number
Catalog
Number
Min. Watts
Max. Watts
Slot Number
Catalog
Number
Min. Watts
Max. Watts
0
1747-L511
1.75
1.75
4
1746-IA16
0.425
4.800
1
1746-BAS
3.750
3.80
5
1746-IA16
0.425
4.800
2
1746-IA8
0.250
2.40
6
1746-OW16
5.170
5.500(2)
3
1746-OV8
0.675
6.90
7
1746-OW16
5.170
5.700
Peripheral
Device
1747-DTAM
2.500
2.50
NA
NA
NA
NA
User Power to
Peripheral
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
2.400(1)
NA
(1) The user power on the 1746-P1 power supply for Chassis 2 is being used to power a peripheral (100 mA at 24V dc).
(2) This output card uses 5.5 Watts because only 10 points are on at any one time. Using the calculated watts formula - (number of points energized x watts per point) +
minimum watts = heat dissipation of module - the calculated watts for the 1746-OW16 module is 5.5W: (10 points x.33) + 5.17 = 5.5W.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
G-8
Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System
Example Worksheet for Calculating Heat Dissipation
Procedure:
1. Calculate the heat dissipation for each chassis without the power supply.
a. Write in the watts (calculated watts or total watts, see page 12) dissipated by the processor, I/O and specialty modules, and any
peripheral devices attached to the processor. Then, for each chassis, add these values together.
peripheral device:
peripheral device:
Chassis 1
Cat No Ht Dis
Chassis 2
Cat No Ht Dis
L511
BAS
IA8
OV8
IA16
IA16
OW16
OW16
1.75
3.8
2.4
6.9
Chassis 3
Cat No Ht Dis
Chassis 1 Chassis 2 Chassis 3 Heat Dissipation
4.8
4.8
5.5
5.7
DTAM 2.5
Total:
17.35
20.8
b. Place the heat dissipation for each chassis into the appropriate columns.
17.35
20.8
—
2. Calculate the heat dissipation for each power supply.
a. Calculate the power supply loading for each chassis (write in the minimum
watts) for each device (see page G-3) add these values together.
Important: If you have a device connected to user power, multiply 24V by the
current used. Include user power in the total power supply loading
Chassis 1
Cat No Min Ht Dis
Chassis 2
Cat No Min Ht Dis
L511
BAS
IA8
OV8
IA16
IA16
OW16
OW16
1.75
3.750
0.250
0.675
0.425
0.425
5.17
5.17
user power
peripheral device: DTAM 2.5
peripheral device:
2.4
Total:
13.59
8.925
Chassis 3
Chassis 1 Chassis 2 Chassis 3 Heat Dissipation
Cat No Min Ht Dis
b. Use the power supply loading for each chassis and the graphs on page G-6 to
determine the power supply dissipation. Place the power supply dissipations
into the appropriate columns.
3. Add the chassis dissipation to the power supply dissipation.
4. Add across the columns for the total heat dissipation of your controller.
5. Convert to BTUs/hr by multiplying the total heat dissipation of your controller by
3.414.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
8.925
26.275
13.59
34.39
—
—
Total (Watts):
60.665
Total BTUs/hr):
207.11
Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System
G-9
Blank Worksheet for Calculating Heat Dissipation
Procedure:
1. Calculate the heat dissipation for each chassis without the power supply.
a. Write in the watts (calculated watts or total watts, see page 12) dissipated by the processor, I/O and specialty modules, and any
peripheral devices attached to the processor. Then, for each chassis, add these values together.
Chassis 1
Cat No Ht Dis
Chassis 2
Cat No Ht Dis
Chassis 3
Chassis 1 Chassis 2 Chassis 3 Heat Dissipation
Cat No Ht Dis
peripheral device:
peripheral device:
Total:
b. Place the heat dissipation for each chassis into the appropriate columns.
2. Calculate the heat dissipation for each power supply.
a. Calculate the power supply loading for each chassis (write in the minimum
watts) for each device (see page G-3) add these values together.
Important: If you have a device connected to user power, multiply 24V by the
current used. Include user power in the total power supply loading
Chassis 1
Cat No Min Ht Dis
Chassis 2
Cat No Min Ht Dis
Chassis 3
Chassis 1 Chassis 2 Chassis 3 Heat Dissipation
Cat No Min Ht Dis
.
user power
peripheral device:
peripheral device:
Total:
b. Use the power supply loading for each chassis and the graphs on page G-6 to
determine the power supply dissipation. Place the power supply dissipations
into the appropriate columns.
3. Add the chassis dissipation to the power supply dissipation.
4. Add across the columns for the total heat dissipation of your controller.
5. Convert to BTUs/hr by multiplying the total heat dissipation of your controller by
3.414.
Total (Watts):
Total BTUs/hr):
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
G-10
Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Glossary
The following terms are used throughout this manual. Refer to the
Allen-Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary, Publication Number
AG-7.1, for a complete guide to Allen-Bradley technical terms.
address
A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location. For
example, I:1/0 is the memory address for data located in Input file
word 1, bit 0.
AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter
A device that provides RS-232 isolation to an RS-485 Half-Duplex
communication link. (Catalog Number 1761-NET-AIC.)
application
1) A machine or process monitored and controlled by a controller.
2) The use of computer- or processor-based routines for specific purposes.
Auto Answer
Type of modem that has self-contained timeouts and tests. They can
answer and hang the phone up automatically.
Backplane Current Draw
The amount of current the module requires from the backplane. The
sum of the backplane current draw for all modules in a chassis is used
to select the appropriate chassis power supply.
Baud Rate
The speed of communication between devices on a network. All
devices must communicate at the same baud rate. For example, the
DH-485 network devices default to 19,200 baud.
bit
The smallest unit of memory used in discrete or binary logic, where
the value 1 represents ON and 0 represents OFF.
block diagrams
A method used to illustrate logic components or a sequence of events.
1
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
2
Glossary
Boolean operators
Logical operators such as AND, OR, NAND, NOR, NOT, and
Exclusive-OR that can be used singularly or in combination to form
logic statements or circuits. Can have an output response of T or F.
BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol)
A low-level protocol that provides configuration information to other
nodes on a TCP/IP network with DOS, Microsoft Windows,
Windows NT, Windows 9x, VMS, and HP-UNIX platforms.
branch
A parallel logic path within a rung of a ladder program. Its primary
use is to build OR logic.
Calculated Watts
The amount of heat generated by those points energized on an I/O
module.
Channel
Communication port on a module.
Chassis
A hardware assembly that houses devices such as I/O modules,
adapter modules, processor modules, and power supplies.
CIP (Control and Information Protocol)
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
communication scan
A part of the controller’s operating cycle. Communication with devices
(such as other controllers and operator interface devices) takes place
during this period.
Continuous Current Per Module
The maximum current for each module. The sum of the output
current for each point should not exceed this value.
Continuous Current Per Point
The maximum current each output is designed to continuously supply
to a load.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Glossary
3
control program
User logic (the application) that defines the controller’s operation.
controller
A device, such as a programmable controller, used to control output
devices.
controller overhead
A portion of the operating cycle used for housekeeping purposes
(memory checks, tests, communications, etc.).
control profile
The means by which a controller determines which outputs turn on
under what conditions.
counter
A device that counts the occurrence of some event.
CPU (Central Processing Unit)
The decision-making and data storage section of a programmable
controller.
CSP (Client Server Protocol)
data table
The part of processor memory that contains I/O status and files where
user data (such as bit, integer, timers, and counters) is monitored,
manipulated, and changed for control purposes.
DCHP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
A protocol used to assign dynamic IP addresses to devices residing on
a network.
DF1 protocol
A peer-to-peer link-layer protocol that combines features of ANSI
X3.28-1976 specification subcategories D1 (data transparency) and F1
(two-way simultaneous transmission with embedded responses).
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
4
Glossary
DIN rail
Manufactured according to Deutsche Industrie Normenausshus (DIN)
standards, a metal railing designed to ease installation and mounting
of your devices.
Direct Connect
type of modem that is connected to a dedicated, leased phone line
and is active at all times.
DH+
Data Highway Plus implements peer-to-peer communication with a
token-passing scheme to rotate link mastership among the nodes
connected to that link. Data Highway Plus has the capability for
online programming and is optimized for networks with fewer nodes
(Data Highway Plus supports up to 64 nodes).
DH-485 Network
The DH-485 network is a collection of devices connected to the
communication cable allowing information exchange. A
communication network based on the EIA Standard for RS-485 using
an Allen-Bradley proprietary protocol.
Discrete Input and Output (DIO)
The discrete input and output is the transfer of one to 32 words
between a SLC-500 processor and a scanner. All 32 words of input
data and all 32 words of output data are updated on each SLC
program scan.
download
The transfer of program or data files to a device.
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
DTE Controlled Answer
Type of modem that is unattended and is attached directly to the
phone lines. The interface module or the SLC 5/03 processor acts as
the Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) which controls the modem via
the DTR and RTS signals. The module incorporates timeouts and tests
to properly operate these types of modems.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Glossary
5
DTR Dialing (SLC 5/03 only)
Type of modem that lets you dial a number or end a call based on the
status of the RS232 DTR (Data Terminal Ready) signal. To program the
modem initialization string and phone number into the internal
memory of the modem, use a dumb terminal (or PC running terminal
emulation software like Procomm, Window’s Terminal, or PBASE).
Once you have programmed the modem, activate the DTR signal to
dial the number, or deactivate the DTR signal to end the call.
EEPROM
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory module used
to store, back-up, or transfer SLC 500 programs. The SLC 500 can read
and write to an EEPROM.
EMI
Electromagnetic interference.
encoder
A device that detects position, and transmits a signal representing that
position.
Ethernet Network
A local area network with a baseband communication rate of 10M bits
per second.
executing mode
Any run or test mode.
false
The status of an instruction that does not provide a continuous logical
path on a ladder rung.
FIFO (First-In-First-Out)
The order that data is stored and retrieved from a file.
file
A collection of data or logic organized into groups.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
6
Glossary
Flash EPROM
Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory module. It
combines the programming versatility of EEPROMs with the security
precautions of UVPROMs. This means that you have the option of
leaving your EPROM programs write protected or unprotected.
Full-duplex
A high-performance protocol that allows simultaneous two-way data
transmission. For point-to-point applications only.
Half-duplex
A high-performance protocol where data transmission is limited to
one direction at a time. Used in point-to-point and multi-point
applications.
hard disk
A storage device in a personal computer.
high byte
Bits 8 to 15 of a word.
housekeeping
The portion of the scan when the controller performs internal checks
and services communications.
Initiator
A node on the DH-485 network capable of acting as a master. When
an initiator has the token it can send messages and request replies
from any node on the DH-485 network. A personal computer running
your programming software is an initiator on the data link. The
SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors can also be
initiators.
Input Device
A device, such as a push button or a switch, that supplies signals
through input circuits to a programmable controller.
input scan
The controller reads all input devices connected to the input
terminals.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Glossary
7
Inrush Current
The temporary surge current produced when a device or circuit is
initially energized.
instruction
A mnemonic defining an operation to be performed by the processor.
A rung in a program consists of a set of input and output instructions.
The input instructions are evaluated by the controller as being true or
false. In turn, the controller sets the output instructions to true or false.
instruction set
The set of instructions available within a controller.
I/O
Inputs and Outputs
IP Address
A 32-bit address assigned to hosts that want to participate in a TCP/IP
internet. IP addresses are the abstraction of physical hardware
addresses, with a network and host partition which makes routing
efficient.
Isolated Link Coupler
The link coupler provides an electrically isolated network connection
for an SLC 500 controller (processor or programming station). The link
couplers connect the daisy-chained DH-485 communication cable.
ladder logic
A graphical programming format resembling a ladder-like diagram.
The ladder logic programing language is the most common
programmable controller language.
least significant bit (LSB)
The element (or bit) in a binary word that carries the smallest value of
weight.
LED
Light Emitting Diode. Used as status indicator for processor functions
and inputs and outputs.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
8
Glossary
LIFO (Last-In-First-Out)
The order that data is stored and retrieved from a file.
low byte
Bits 0 to 7 of a word.
logic
A general term for digital circuits or programmed instructions to
perform required decision making and computational functions.
Manual
Typically an acoustically coupled type of modem. The connection is
established by a person on each end of the phone line. They then
insert the handsets into an acoustic coupler to complete the
connection.
Master Control Relay (MCR)
A hard-wired relay that can be de-energized by any series-connected
emergency stop switch.
mnemonic
A simple and easy to remember term that is used to represent a
complex or lengthy set of information.
modem
Modulator/demodulator. Equipment that connects data terminal
equipment to a communication line.
modes
Selected methods of operation. Example: run, test, or program.
Maximum Watts
The maximum amount of heat that the module generates with field
power present.
Minimum Load Current
The lowest amount of current the output is designed to operate at.
Operating at or below this value is not reliable.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Glossary
9
Minimum Watts
The amount of heat dissipation that can occur when there is no field
power present.
Multi-master network
A network in which more than one node has the ability to initiate
communications and initialize the link.
M0/M1 File Transfer
A M1/M0 file transfer is a method of moving large amounts of data
between a SLC 500 processor and its scanner. It transfers files
containing a maximum of 256 words and may take more than one SLC
program scan to complete.
negative logic
The use of binary logic in such a way that “0” represents the desired
voltage level.
Network
A series of stations (nodes) connected by some type of
communication medium. A network may be made up of a single link
or multiple links.
Node
Also called a station. An address or software location on the network.
Nominal Input Current
The current at nominal input voltage.
normally closed
Contacts on a relay or switch that are closed when the relay is
de-energized or deactivated. They are open when the relay is
energized or the switch is activated.
normally open
Contacts on a relay or switch that are open when the relay is
de-energized or the switch is deactivated. They are closed when the
relay is energized or the switch is activated.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
10
Glossary
off-delay time
The OFF delay time is a measure of the time required for the
controller logic to recognize that a signal has been removed from the
input terminal of the controller. The time is determined by circuit
component delays and by any applied filter.
offline
When a device is not scanning/controlling or when a programming
device is not communicating with the controller.
offset
A continuous deviation of a controlled variable from a fixed point.
Off-State Current
For input circuits, the maximum amount of leakage current allowed
from an input device in its Off-state.
off-state leakage current
When a mechanical switch is opened (off-state), no current flows
through the switch. Semiconductor switches and transient suppression
components which are sometimes used to protect switches, have a
small current flow when they are in the off state. This current is
referred to as the off-state leakage current. To ensure reliable
operation, the off-state leakage current rating must be less than the
minimum operating current rating of the device that is connected.
Off-State Voltage (max)
The maximum input voltage level detected as an Off condition by the
input module.
on-delay time
The ON delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller
logic to recognize that a signal has been presented at the input
terminal of the controller.
one shot
A programming technique that sets a bit ON or OFF for one program
scan.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Glossary
11
online
When a device is scanning/controlling or when a programming device
is communicating with the controller.
On-State Voltage Drop
The voltage developed across the output driver circuit during the On
state at maximum load current.
Operating Voltage
For inputs, the voltage range needed for the input to be in the On
state. For outputs, the allowable range of user-supplied voltage.
Output Device
A device, such as a pilot light or a motor starter coil, that is energized
by the programmable controller.
output scan
The controller turns on, off, or modifies the devices connected to the
output terminals.
PCCC (Programmable Controller Communications Commands)
Points per Common
The number of input or output points connected to a single return
(common) or supply (vcc).
Poll Message
A poll message is a point-to-point transfer of data sent by the scanner
that solicits a response from a single device. The device responds with
its data bit and status bit.
processor
A Central Processing Unit. (See CPU.)
processor files
The set of program and data files resident in the controller.
program file
Areas within a processor that contain the logic programs. SLC
controllers support multiple program files.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
12
Glossary
program mode
When the controller is not scanning the control program.
program scan
A part of the controller’s operating cycle. During the program scan,
the logic program is processed and the Output Image is updated.
programming device
Programming package used to develop ladder logic diagrams.
Protocol
The “language” or packaging of information that is transmitted across
a network.
(I/O) Rack
An I/O addressing unit that corresponds to 8 input image-table words
and 8 output image-table words. A rack can contain a maximum of 8
I/O groups for up to 128 discrete I/O.
read
To acquire data. For example, the processor reads information from
other devices via a read message.
relay
An electrically operated device that mechanically switches electrical
circuits.
relay logic
A representation of binary or discrete logic.
Remote I/O Network
A network where the communication between the processor and the
I/O is across a serial link.
restore
To transfer a program from a device to a controller.
reserved bit
A location reserved for internal use.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Glossary
13
retentive data
Information (data) that is preserved through power cycles.
RS-232
An EIA standard that specifies electrical, mechanical, and functional
characteristics for serial binary communication circuits.
RTB
Removable Terminal Block.
run mode
An executing mode during which the controller scans or executes the
logic program.
rung
A rung contains input and output instructions. During Run mode, the
inputs on a rung are evaluated to be true or false. If a path of true
logic exists, the outputs are made true (energized). If all paths are
false, the outputs are made false (de-energized).
save
To save a program to a computer hard disk.
scan
The scan is made up of four elements: input scan, program scan,
output scan, and housekeeping.
scan time
The time required for the controller to complete one scan.
Signal Delay
For inputs, the response time required to transmit the circuit status
from the field wiring to the digital logic. For outputs, the time required
to transmit the circuit status from digital logic to the output wiring.
sinking
A term used to describe current flow between two devices. A sinking
device provides a direct path to ground.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
14
Glossary
sinking/sourcing
Describes a current signal flow relationship between field input and
output devices in a control system and their power supply. Sourcing
I/O modules supply (or source) current to sinking field devices.
Sinking I/O modules receive (or sink) current from sourcing field
devices.
sourcing
A term used to describe current flow between two devices. A sourcing
device or circuit provides power.
status
The condition of a circuit or system.
Strobe Message
A strobe message is a multicast transfer of data sent by the scanner
that solicits a response from each slave device. The devices respond
with their data.
Surge Current Per Point
The maximum amplitude and duration (pulse) of current allowed for a
given period of time and temperature.
Surge Suppressor
A device used to absorb voltage transients created by energizing an
inductive load to reduce electrical noise or to protect the output
circuit. For example, an R-C network, MOV (metal oxide varistor) or
diode.
terminal
A point on an I/O module that external devices, such as a push button
or pilot light, are wired to.
throughput
The time between when an input turns on and a corresponding
output turns on or off. Throughput consists of input delays, program
scan, output delays, and overhead.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Glossary
15
Token
The logical right to initiate communications. In a multi-master network
a single token is passed between initiators to make sure two nodes do
not transmit at the same time.
true
The status of an instruction that provides a continuous logical path on
a ladder rung.
upload
Data is transferred from the controller to a programming or storage
device.
UVPROM
An Ultra-Violet light erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
module used to back-up, store, or transfer SLC 500 programs. The SLC
5/01 and SLC 5/02 can only read from a UVPROM. An external PROM
programmer is used to program (write to) the device.
Voltage Category
The nominal voltage used to describe the module.
watchdog timer
A timer that monitors a cyclical process and is cleared at the
conclusion of each cycle. If the watchdog runs past its programmed
time period, it causes a fault.
Watts Per Point
The maximum heat dissipation that can occur in each field wiring
point when energized.
write
To send data to another device. For example, the processor writes
data to another device with a message write instruction.
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
16
Glossary
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Index
Numerics
1746-BAS module A-3, B-3
1746-C7 cable 6-8
1746-C9 cable 6-8
1746-P1 power supply
installing 6-5
replacing fuse 9-7
specifications 2-14
1746-P2 power supply
installing 6-5
replacing fuse 9-7
specifications 2-14
1746-P3 power supply
installing 6-5
replacing fuse 9-7
special considerations for grounding 3-6
specifications 2-14
1746-P4 power supply
installing 6-5
specifications 2-14
1746-P6 power supply
specifications 2-14
1746-P7 power supply
specifications 2-14
1747-AIC link coupler
connecting the communication cable
A-14
using on the DH-485 network A-4
1747-BA, lithium battery 2-12
1747-KE module
as an RS-232 communication device B-3
on the DH-485 network A-3
1747-KFC15 D-6
1747-KTX 1-2
1747-L511 processor 5-1
1747-L514 processor 5-1
1747-L524 processor 5-3
1747-L532 processor 5-6
1747-L541 processor 5-9
1747-L542 processor 5-9
1747-L543 processor 5-9
1747-L551 processor 5-12, 5-13
1747-L552 processor 5-12, 5-13
1747-L553 processor 5-12, 5-13
1747-M1 EEPROM 2-22
1747-M12 Flash EPROM 2-23
1747-M2 EEPROM 2-22
1747-M5 adapter socket 2-22
1747-PCMK 1-2
1747-PIC 1-2
1747-PKTX 1-2
1747-SCNR D-6
1747-SDN D-3
1747-UIC 1-2, 1-8
description 2-19, A-5
example network A-5
function on DH-485 A-3
Installation Instructions publication A-3
1761-NET-DNI D-4
1770-KF3 module A-3
1771-KGM module B-5
1784-KR module A-3
1784-KT/B card C-6
1784-KTX card A-4, C-6
1784-KTXD card A-4, C-6
1784-PCMK card A-4, C-6
1785-KA5 module
on the data highway plus network C-6
24V dc user power output voltage 2-14
2760-RB module A-3
5/01 processor
general specifications 2-11
hardware features 5-1, 6-2
LEDs 5-2
troubleshooting 10-3
5/02 processors
general specifications 2-11
hardware features 5-3
installing 6-2
LEDs 5-5
troubleshooting 10-3
5/03 processor
active modem-control lines
CTS (Clear to Send) B-10
DCD (Data Carrier Detect) B-10
DSR (Data Set Ready) B-10
DTR (Data Terminal Ready) B-10
RTS (Request to Send) B-10
general specifications 2-11
hardware features 5-6
installing 6-2
keyswitch 5-14
LEDs 5-8
returning processor to “initial factory
conditions” 10-21
troubleshooting 10-9
5/03 processors
channel 0, RS-232 communication
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
2
Index
5/04 processors
active modem-control lines
CTS (Clear to Send) B-10
DCD (Data Carrier Detect) B-10
DSR (Data Set Ready) B-10
DTR (Data Terminal Ready) B-10
RTS (Request to Send) B-10
channel 0, RS-232 communication C-2
general specifications 2-11
hardware features 5-9
installing 6-2
keyswitch 5-14
LEDs 5-10, 5-13
returning processor to “initial factory
conditions” 10-21
troubleshooting 10-9
5/05 processors
channel 0, RS-232 communication
embedded web server E-12
Ethernet communications E-1
general specifications 2-11
hardware features 5-12, 5-13
installing 6-2
returning processor to ”initial factory
conditions” 10-21
troubleshooting 10-9
A
address Glossary-1
AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter
Glossary-1
mounting dimensions 4-6
ambient operating temperature rating,
for power supplies 2-14
ambient temperature rating, processor
specification 2-11
application Glossary-1
Article 70B of the NFPA 3-13
Article 70E of the NFPA 3-1
ASCII communication B-10
B
BASIC programming language B-3
batteries, lithium
Code of Federal Regulations, 49 CFR
173.22a 9-2
DOT-E7052 provision 9-2
shipping when depleted 9-2
storing and handling 9-1
transportation 9-2
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
battery
installation
SLC 5/01 or SLC 5/02 processors 9-3
SLC 5/03 and higher processors 9-4
Belden #9463 C-4
Belden #9842
on the DH-485 network A-13
wire/terminal connections A-15
bit Glossary-1
block diagrams Glossary-1
Boolean operators Glossary-2
BOOTP
configuring SLC 5/05 E-6–E-9
using the Rockwell Utility E-8
branch Glossary-2
C
cable routes, planning A-10
cables
1746-C7 6-8
1746-C9 6-8
Belden #9463 C-4
Belden #9842 A-14
certification
power supplies 2-14
processors 2-11
channel 0
pinout B-2
RS-232 communication port B-2
chassis
13-slot modular mounting dimensions 4-2
date shown on 3-7
chassis interconnect cables, installation
of 6-8
CIP
definition Glossary-2
clock, real-time
SLC 5/03 processor 5-6
SLC 5/04 processors 5-9
SLC 5/05 processors 5-12, 5-13
Common Power Source 3-9
common techniques used in this manual
P-3
communication protocols
ASCII B-10
data highway plus C-1
DF1 full-duplex B-4
DF1 half-duplex B-5
DH-485 B-2, C-2
Ethernet E-1
communication scan Glossary-2
Index
contact protection
diodes 2-28
RC network 2-28
surge suppressor 2-28
varistor 2-28
contacting Rockwell Automation for
assistance 10-1
Control Networks
Allen-Bradley Remote I/O D-1
ControlNet D-6
DeviceNet D-3
overview D-1
Remote I/O Network D-1
control profile Glossary-3
control program Glossary-3
controller
definition Glossary-3
overhead Glossary-3
ControlNet Messaging Module D-6
ControlNet Network D-6
1747-KFC15 D-6
1747-SCNR D-6
ControlNet Scanner D-6
ControlView 300 B-5
counters
definition Glossary-3
CPU (central processing unit), definition
Glossary-3
CTS (Clear to Send) B-10
D
data highway plus communication
protocol
overview C-1
typical configuration C-6
using the SLC 5/04 processors C-2
wiring the SLC 5/04 processors C-4
data packets B-4
data table Glossary-3
Data Table Access Module
monitoring with 2-19
mounting dimensions 4-5
DCD (Data Carrier Detect) B-10
DCE (Data Communication Equipment)
B-10
DeviceNet Interface D-4
DeviceNet Network D-3
1747-SDN D-3
1761-NET-DNI D-4
length D-5
DeviceNet Scanner D-3
3
DF1 full-duplex B-4
DF1 half-duplex protocol B-5
DF1 protocol
full-duplex B-4
half-duplex B-5
modem overview B-10
overview B-4
DH+ network
devices that use the
1784-KT/B card C-6
1784KT/B card C-6
1784-KTX card C-6
1784-KTXD card C-6
1784-PCMK card C-6
DH-485 Interface Converters
1747-PIC 2-19
1747-UIC 2-19
DH-485 network
description A-1
devices that use the
1746-BAS module A-3
1747-KE module A-3
1747-UIC A-3
1770-KF3 module A-3
1784-KR module A-3
1784-KTX card A-4
1784-KTXD card A-4
1784-PCMK card A-4
2760-RB module A-3
example system configuration A-7
grounding and terminating A-16
initialization A-2
installation A-13
isolated link coupler A-4
planning considerations A-9
protocol A-2
DH-485/RS-232 Interface Module user’s
manual B-3
DHCP
configuring SLC 5/05 E-9
definition Glossary-2
DIN rail Glossary-4
discrete I/O modules 2-12
download Glossary-4
DSR (Data Set Ready) B-10
DTAM Micro
mounting dimensions 4-5
DTAM Plus
monitoring with 2-20
mounting dimensions 4-5
DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) B-10
DTE controlled answer Glossary-4
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
4
Index
DTE, definition Glossary-4
DTR (Data Terminal Ready) B-10
DTR dialing Glossary-5
E
EEPROM
1K User Words 2-22
4K User Words 2-22
EEPROM burning options 2-23
embedded responses B-4
EMC Directive 6-1
emergency controller shutdown 3-7
EmergencyStop Switches 3-9
EMI Glossary-5
enclosures
selecting 2-17
encoder
definition Glossary-5
end device B-4
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
9-3
equipment needed for installation 1-2
errors
SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 processors 10-4
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, SLC 5/05 processors
10-10
while downloading an operating system
10-19
Ethernet
advanced functions E-10
messaging E-2
processor performance E-2
using the SLC 5/05 processors E-1
European Union Directive Compliance
2-2
European Union Directives 6-1
executing mode Glossary-5
F
false Glossary-5
features
SLC 5/01 processor 5-1
SLC 5/02 processors 5-3
SLC 5/03 processor 5-6
SLC 5/04 processors 5-9
SLC 5/05 processors 5-12, 5-13
FIFO (First-In-First-Out) Glossary-5
file Glossary-5
full-duplex
(point-to-point) B-5
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
fuse protection, power supply
specification 2-14
fuses, for power supply
installation 9-7
troubleshooting tips 10-3
G
getting started quickly
overview 1-1
procedures 1-2
Required Tools and Equipment 1-2
ground bus 3-5
grounding guidelines
overview 3-4
special considerations for DC
applications using 1746-P3 3-6
H
half-duplex master protocol, A-B
products that support B-5
hard disk Glossary-6
hazardous environment
selecting hardware components 2-25
heat, preventing excessive 3-3
high byte Glossary-6
housekeeping Glossary-6
humidity rating, power supply
specification 2-14
humidity, processor specification 2-11
I
I/O devices, recommendations for wiring
terminals, identify 7-5
wires, bundle 7-5
wires, label 7-5
I/O modules
discrete 2-12
specialty 2-12
I/O modules, wiring 7-6
IBM AT connector pin assignment B-13
input modules
installing 6-3
troubleshooting 10-23
wiring 7-6
input scan Glossary-6
input states on power down 3-11
installation
chassis interconnect cables 6-8
getting started quickly 1-1
Index
inspecting 8-2
lithium battery on SLC 5/01 or SLC 5/02
processors 9-3
lithium battery on SLC 5/03 and higher
processors 9-4
memory modules 6-4
modules 6-3
power supplies 6-5
processors 6-2
typical SLC system 3-1
instruction Glossary-7
instruction set
definition Glossary-7
interface converter (1747-PIC) 2-19
internal current capacity, power supply
specification 2-14
isolated link coupler
installing A-13
on DH-485 network A-4
isolation transformers
example calculation 2-25
selecting 2-24
J
jumpers
J1 6-4
J4 10-19
power supply 6-6
K
keyswitch
clearing faults for the SLC 5/03 and
higher processors 10-9
keyswitch location
SLC 5/03 processor 5-6
SLC 5/04 processors 5-9
SLC 5/05 processors 5-12, 5-13
keyswitch positions for the SLC 5/03 and
SLC 5/04 processors
PROG 5-15
REM 5-16
RUN 5-15
L
ladder logic Glossary-7
least significant bit (LSB) Glossary-7
LIFO (Last-In-First-Out) Glossary-8
5
line voltage variations, excessive 2-26
line voltage, power supply specification
2-14
link coupler
mounting dimensions 4-4
lithium batteries
Code of Federal Regulations, 49 CFR
173.22a 9-2
DOT-E7052 provision 9-2
installing on SLC 5/01 or SLC 5/02
processors 9-3
installing on SLC 5/03 and higher
processors 9-4
shipping when depleted 9-2
storing and handling 9-1
transportation 9-2
local I/O capacity, processor
specification 2-11
logic Glossary-8
low byte Glossary-8
M
machine motion, preventing 8-2
maintenance, preventive 3-13
manuals, related P-2
master control relay (MCR)
definition Glossary-8
using 3-7
master devices, DF1 half-duplex protocol
B-5
maximum inrush current, power supply
specification 2-14
memory backup options, processor
specification 2-11
memory modules
for SLC 5/01 and 5/02 processors 2-21
for SLC 5/03 and higher processors 2-22
installation 6-4
mnemonic Glossary-8
modem Glossary-8
modems
for RS232 B-10
modes Glossary-8
modules, installation 6-3
motor starters (bulletin 509)
surge suppressors 2-28
motor starters (bulletin 709)
surge suppressors 2-28
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
6
Index
Mounting
1761-NET-AIC 4-6
Data Terminal Access Module (DTAM)
4-5
DTAM Micro Operator Interface 4-1
DTAM Plus Operator Interface 4-5
link coupler 4-4
Modular Hardware Style Units 4-1
mounting dimensions
AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter 4-6
chassis 4-1–4-3
Data Table Access Module 4-5
DTAM Micro 4-5
DTAM Plus 4-5
link coupler 4-4
MSG instruction B-4
N
National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA) 3-1
negative logic Glossary-9
noise generators 2-26
noise immunity, processor specification
2-11
noise, excessive 2-26
normally closed Glossary-9
normally open Glossary-9
O
offline Glossary-10
offset Glossary-10
off-state leakage current Glossary-10
one shot Glossary-10
online Glossary-11
operator interface
selecting
DTAM 2-19
DTAM Plus 2-20
PanelView 550 2-20
personal computer 2-18
output contact protection, selecting 2-28
output modules
installing 6-3
troubleshooting 10-24
wiring 7-6
output scan Glossary-11
Overview of the Modular Control System
2-3
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
P
PanelView 550 Operator Terminal
monitoring with 2-20
PC connector pin assignment B-13
PCCC
definition Glossary-11
performance
Ethernet processor E-2
personal computer, programming with
2-18
pinout, channel 0 B-2
planning considerations for a network
A-9
Power Considerations
Common Power Source 3-9
Input States on Power Down 3-11
line conditions, other types of 3-12
Loss of Power Source 3-11
power source, loss of 3-11
power supplies
installing 6-5
setting jumpers 6-6
specifications
24V dc user power output voltage
2-14
ambient operating temperature rating 2-14
certification 2-14
fuse protection 2-14
humidity rating 2-14
internal current capacity 2-14
line voltage 2-14
maximum inrush current 2-14
storage temperature 2-14
typical line power requirement 2-14
wiring 2-14
power supply fuse
replacing 9-7
Power Supply Worksheet F-1
power, removing 10-2
Preparing Your Wiring Layout 7-3
Preventing Excessive Heat 3-3
Preventive Maintenance 3-13
processor Glossary-11
installation 6-2
processor files Glossary-11
Index
processor hardware features
SLC 5/01 5-1
SLC 5/02 5-3
SLC 5/03 5-6
SLC 5/04 5-9
SLC 5/05 5-12, 5-13
processor specifications
ambient temperature rating 2-11
certification 2-11
humidity 2-11
LED indicators 2-11
local I/O capacity 2-11
maximum chassis/slots 2-11
memory back-up options 2-11
noise immunity 2-11
program memory 2-11
program scan holdup time after loss of
power 2-11
remote I/O capacity 2-11
shock (operating) 2-11
standard RAM 2-11
vibration 2-11
PROG, keyswitch position for the SLC
5/03 and SLC 5/04 processors
5-15
program alteration 10-3
program file
definition Glossary-11
program memory, processor
specification 2-11
program mode Glossary-12
program scan
definition Glossary-12
program scan hold-up time after loss of
power 2-11
Programmable Controller Grounding and
Wiring Guidelines 3-5
programming device Glossary-12
publications, related P-2
pulses
transient 2-29
Q
Quick Start for Experienced Users 1-1
R
RAM, power back-up
SLC 5/01 or SLC 5/02 processors 9-3
SLC 5/03 and higher processors 9-4
RAM, processor specification 2-11
7
RC network 2-28
read Glossary-12
related publications P-2
relay Glossary-12
relay logic Glossary-12
relays, surge suppressors for 2-28
REM, keyswitch position for the SLC 5/03
and SLC 5/04 processors 5-16
remote I/O capacity, processor
specification 2-11
Remote I/O Network D-1
Remote I/O Passthru D-2
remote I/O passthru D-2
Removable Terminal Blocks (RTB) 7-9
installing 7-10
removing 7-9
using 7-9
removing power from the SLC 500 control
system 10-2
Replacing a fuse on the Power Supply 9-7
required tools and equipment 1-2
reserved bit Glossary-12
restore Glossary-12
retainer clips
replacing on modules 9-6
retentive data Glossary-13
RS-232
connectors B-11
DCE pinout B-12
DF1 protocol B-4
DTE pinout B-11
SLC 500 devices that support B-3
RS-232 connector pin assignments
1746-BAS
to a modem B-16
to DTE B-16
1747-KE
to a modem B-15
to DTE B-15
1770-KF3 to a modem B-17
2760-RB
to a modem B-17
to DTE B-17
IBM AT to an SLC 5/03 processor B-13
PC to a modem B-13
PLC-5
to a modem B-18
to DTE B-18
SLC 5/03 processor
to a modem B-14
to a PC (with cable 1747-CP3) B-15
to DTE B-14
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
8
Index
RS-232 devices
1746-BAS module B-3
1747-KE module B-3
1771-KGM B-5
RS-232, definition Glossary-13
RTB 7-9
RTS (Request to Send) B-10
run mode Glossary-13
RUN, keyswitch position for SLC 5/03 and
SLC 5/04 processors 5-15
rung Glossary-13
S
Safety Considerations 3-12
master control relay circuits, periodic
tests of 3-13
Power Distribution 3-12
Safety Circuits 3-12
save Glossary-13
SCADA applications B-1
scan Glossary-13
scan time Glossary-13
selecting
contact protection 2-28
discrete I/O modules 2-12
enclosures 2-17
isolation transformers 2-24
processors 2-5
SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 memory modules
2-21
SLC 5/03 and higher memory modules
2-22
speciality I/O modules 2-12
surge suppressors 2-26
shock (operating), processor
specification 2-11
sinking Glossary-13
sinking and sourcing 7-1
contact output circuits 7-2
Sinking Device with Sourcing Input
Module Circuit 7-2
Sinking Device with Sourcing Output
Module Circuit 7-3
solidstate DC I/O circuits 7-2
Sourcing Device with Sinking Input
Module 7-2
Sourcing Device with Sinking Output
Module Circuit 7-3
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
slave devices, DF1 half-duplex protocol
B-5
SLC 5/03 processor
see 5/03 processors.
SLC 5/04 processors
see 5/04 processors.
SLC 5/05 processors
see 5/05 processors.
SLC 5/0x-compatible cables 1-2
SLC 5/0x-compatible interfaces 1-2
SLC 500 Programmable Controllers
general specifications 2-11
installing 6-2
selecting a memory module 2-21, 2-22
selecting a processor 2-5
Selecting Discrete I/O Modules 2-12
Selecting Enclosures 2-17
Selecting Isloation Transformers 2-24
Selecting Speciality I/O Modules 2-12
Special Considerations 2-25
troubleshooting 10-1
sourcing Glossary-14
Spacing Your Controllers 3-2
specialty I/O modules 2-12
specifications
power supplies
24V dc user power output voltage
2-14
ambient operating temperature rating 2-14
certification 2-14
fuse protection 2-14
humidity rating 2-14
internal current capacity 2-14
line voltage 2-14
maximum inrush current 2-14
storage temperature 2-14
typical line power requirement 2-14
wiring 2-14
processors
ambient temperature rating 2-11
certification 2-11
clock/calendar accuracy 2-11
humidity 2-11
LED indicators 2-11
local I/O capacity 2-11
maximum chassis/slots 2-11
memory back-up options 2-11
noise immunity 2-11
program memory 2-11
program scan hold-up time after loss
of power 2-11
remote I/O capacity 2-11
Index
shock (operating) 2-11
standard RAM 2-11
vibration 2-11
Starting Up Your Control System 8-1
disconnect motion-causing devices 8-2
enter and test your program 8-9
inspect your installation 8-2
test your inputs 8-5
test your outputs 8-6
start-up instructions 1-1
status Glossary-14
storage temperature, power supply
specification 2-14
surge suppression circuits 2-28
surge suppressors
for motor starters 2-28
for relays 2-28
system configuration, example A-7
system test
general specifications 2-10
T
terminal Glossary-14
testing
inputs 8-5
outputs 8-6
program 8-9
throughput Glossary-14
tools needed for installation 1-2
transistor output transient pulses 2-29
troubleshooting
input modules 10-23
output modules 10-24
SLC 5/01 processor 10-3
SLC 5/02 processors 10-3
SLC 5/03 and higher processors
errors while downloading an operating system 10-19
SLC 5/03 processor 10-9
9
SLC 5/04 processors 10-9
SLC 5/05 processors 10-9
troubleshooting, tips for
program alteration 10-3
removing power 10-2
replacing fuses 10-3
true Glossary-15
typical line power requirement, power
supply specification 2-14
U
Universal Serial Bus
see 1747-UIC
upload Glossary-15
USB
see 1747-UIC
using memory modules (EEPROM and
UVPROM)
EEPROM burning options 2-23
V
varistor 2-28
vibration, processor specification 2-11
W
web server capability E-12–E-22
user provided pages E-16–E-22
wire types
Belden #9463 C-4
wire/terminal connections, for Belden
#9842 A-15
wiring
I/O modules 7-6
wiring layout, preparing your 7-3
wiring, power supply specification 2-14
write Glossary-15
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
10
Index
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003
Publication 1747-UM011D-EN-P - April 2003 2
Supersedes Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Copyright © 2003 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
">